DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
➜
➜
0 vi–xi
The Table of Contents
Find items by function or menu name.
i
i
0 ii–v
The Q&A Index
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from
the “question and answer” index.
➜
0 232–234
The Index
Search by key word.
i
i
i
➜
0 221–223
Error Messages
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the solution here.
➜
0 216–220
Troubleshooting
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”
(0 xii).
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 13
for details.
Digitutor
“Digitutor”, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following
website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q&A Index
0
0
0
ii
vi
1
Table of Contents
Introduction
X
s
x
y
z
t
I
Q
o
i
L
g
u
w
n
Basic Photography and Playback
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)
Recording and Viewing Movies
More on Photography (All Modes)
P, S, A, and M Modes
0 27
0 41
0 49
0 53
0 79
0 115
0 131
0 146
0 148
0 153
0 165
0 174
0 190
0 193
More on Playback
Connections
The Playback Menu
The Shooting Menu
Custom Settings
The Setup Menu
The Retouch Menu
Recent Settings /
Technical Notes
My Menu
v
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.
❚❚Camera Displays
Question
Key phrase
0
The information display 8, 167
What do these icons mean?
The viewfinder
6
Number of exposures
remaining
How many more shots can I take with this card?
29
How much charge does the battery have left?
How do I keep the displays from turning off?
How do I display the menus in another language?
How do I adjust monitor brightness?
Battery level
Auto off timers
Language
28
157
169
166
158
LCD brightness
Grid display
Can I display a framing grid in the viewfinder?
How do I view more information about a photo?
Photo information 117–121
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Taking Photographs
Question
Key phrase
Auto modes
Scene modes
0
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots?
How do I quickly adjust settings for different scenes?
Can I frame photos in the monitor?
28–32
33–38
41–47
45
Live view
Can I angle the monitor for easier framing?
Can I shoot movies?
Recording movies
50–51
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?
Can I take pictures with a small file size for e-mail?
Can I choose how the camera focuses?
Image quality and size 62–64
Focus mode
Focus point
54–55
58
Can I choose the focus point?
Can I change the composition without refocusing?
How do I focus on a subject that is not in a focus area?
Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed?
How do I avoid “red-eye”?
3D-tracking
57
Focus lock
58
Auto flash
71–72
71–72
30
Red-eye reduction
Auto (flash off) mode
Flash off
How do I keep the flash from firing?
70–72
155
How do I turn off the light on the front of the camera?
How do I shoot a series of photos in quick succession?
Can I reduce camera noise in quiet surroundings?
How do I take pictures with the self-timer?
How do I use the optional remote control?
What is exposure?
AF-assist illuminator
Release mode
65–66
Self-timer
Remote control
Exposure
67–69
80
How do I “freeze” motion?
Mode S (shutter-priority
82
auto)
How do I suggest motion by blurring moving objects?
Mode A (aperture-
priority auto)
Can I blur the background to bring out a subject?
83
90
Can I make photos brighter or darker?
Exposure compensation
How do I create “light trails” behind moving objects?
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights?
Can I take photos at preset intervals?
Long time-exposures 86–87
Active D-Lighting 94–95
Interval timer shooting 76–77
How do I focus the viewfinder?
Viewfinder focus
Beep
25
How do I keep the camera from beeping?
158
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Viewing, Retouching, and Printing Photographs
Question
Key phrase
0
How do I view photographs on the camera?
Playback
39, 116
40,
126–128
How do I delete unwanted photos?
Deleting photos
Can I zoom in on photos during playback?
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?
Can I view photos on HD or standard TVs?
How do I copy photos to a computer?
Playback zoom
Protect
124
125
Slide show
129
Viewing on TV
Computer
132–133
134–135
136–144
138, 141
143
How do I print photos?
Printing
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?
How do I order professional prints?
Time stamp
Print set (DPOF)
Retouch
Can I create retouched copies of photos?
How do I remove “red-eye”?
174–189
176
Red-eye correction
Image overlay
NEF (RAW) processing
Color outline
Can I overlay two photos to make a single image?
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?
Can I copy a photo to use as a base for a painting?
Can I make stop-motion movies from my photos?
182–183
184
186
Stop-motion movie 187–188
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Menus and Settings
Question
Key phrase
Using the menus
Help
0
13–15
13
How do I use the menus?
How do I get help for a menu or message?
Error messages
221
The information display 8, 9
How do I adjust settings?
The command dial
Menus
10–12
145–192
78
How do I restore default settings?
How do I set the camera clock?
Two-button reset
Time zone and date
20, 169
How do I keep the file number from being reset when I
insert a new memory card?
File number sequence
159
How do I reset file numbering to 1?
Is there a quick way to access frequently-used settings?
Is there a quick way to access recently-used settings?
My Menu
191
190
Recent settings
❚❚Miscellaneous
Question
Key phrase
0
What do I do with the eyepiece cap?
What memory cards can I use?
What lenses can I use?
The DK-5 eyepiece cap 67, 77
Approved memory cards 203
Compatible lenses
Optional flash units
194
198
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?
What software is available for my camera?
What other accessories are available for my camera?
How do I clean the camera?
Accessories
202
Cleaning
Servicing
205
205
Who do I go to for servicing and repairs?
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Q&A Index .................................................................................................................................... ii
For Your Safety ......................................................................................................................... xii
Notices........................................................................................................................................xiv
Introduction
1
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 2
Getting to Know the Camera................................................................................................. 3
The Camera Body ......................................................................................................................3
The Mode Dial.............................................................................................................................5
The Viewfinder............................................................................................................................6
The Monitor.................................................................................................................................7
The Information Display..........................................................................................................8
The Command Dial ................................................................................................................ 10
The Power Switch................................................................................................................... 12
Camera Menus..........................................................................................................................13
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................................................ 14
First Steps ...................................................................................................................................16
Charge the Battery................................................................................................................. 16
Insert the Battery .................................................................................................................... 17
Attach a Lens............................................................................................................................ 18
Basic Setup................................................................................................................................ 20
Insert a Memory Card............................................................................................................ 22
Format the Memory Card .................................................................................................... 23
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...................................................................................................... 25
Basic Photography and Playback
27
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)...................................................28
Step 1: Turn the Camera On................................................................................................ 28
Step 2: Select i or j Mode ............................................................................................... 30
Step 3: Frame the Photograph .......................................................................................... 30
Step 4: Focus ............................................................................................................................ 31
Step 5: Shoot ............................................................................................................................ 32
Creative Photography (Scene Modes) .............................................................................33
k Portrait .............................................................................................................................. 34
l Landscape........................................................................................................................ 34
p Child .................................................................................................................................. 34
m Sports ................................................................................................................................ 34
n Close Up ........................................................................................................................... 35
o Night Portrait.................................................................................................................. 35
r Night Landscape ........................................................................................................... 35
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s Party/Indoor....................................................................................................................35
t Beach/Snow ....................................................................................................................36
u Sunset................................................................................................................................36
v Dusk/Dawn......................................................................................................................36
w Pet Portrait.......................................................................................................................36
x Candlelight........................................................................................................................37
y Blossom.............................................................................................................................37
z Autumn Colors ...............................................................................................................37
0 Food....................................................................................................................................37
1 Silhouette.........................................................................................................................38
2 High Key............................................................................................................................38
3 Low Key.............................................................................................................................38
Basic Playback...........................................................................................................................39
Deleting Unwanted Photographs.....................................................................................40
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)
41
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ..............................................................................42
Recording and Viewing Movies
49
Recording Movies....................................................................................................................50
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................................52
More on Photography (All Modes)
53
Focus ............................................................................................................................................54
Focus Mode...............................................................................................................................54
AF-Area Mode ..........................................................................................................................56
Focus Point Selection ............................................................................................................58
Focus Lock.................................................................................................................................58
Manual Focus ...........................................................................................................................60
Image Quality and Size..........................................................................................................62
Image Quality...........................................................................................................................62
Image Size..................................................................................................................................64
Release Mode............................................................................................................................65
Self-Timer and Remote Modes...........................................................................................67
Using the Built-in Flash..........................................................................................................70
Flash Mode................................................................................................................................71
ISO Sensitivity............................................................................................................................74
Interval Timer Photography.................................................................................................76
Two-Button Reset ....................................................................................................................78
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P, S, A, and M Modes
79
Shutter Speed and Aperture ...............................................................................................80
Mode P (Programmed Auto).............................................................................................. 81
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto).......................................................................................... 82
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) ...................................................................................... 83
Mode M (Manual) ................................................................................................................... 84
Exposure .....................................................................................................................................88
Metering .................................................................................................................................... 88
Autoexposure Lock................................................................................................................ 89
Exposure Compensation...................................................................................................... 90
Flash Compensation.............................................................................................................. 92
Active D-Lighting.................................................................................................................... 94
White Balance ...........................................................................................................................96
Fine-Tuning White Balance................................................................................................. 98
Preset Manual .......................................................................................................................... 99
Bracketing ............................................................................................................................... 103
Picture Controls..................................................................................................................... 106
Selecting a Picture Control................................................................................................106
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ..............................................................................108
Creating Custom Picture Controls..................................................................................111
Sharing Custom Picture Controls ...................................................................................113
The GP-1 GPS Unit................................................................................................................ 114
More on Playback
115
Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 116
Photo Information................................................................................................................117
Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 122
Calendar Playback................................................................................................................ 123
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 124
Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 125
Deleting Photographs ........................................................................................................ 126
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback........................................................126
The Playback Menu..............................................................................................................127
Slide Shows............................................................................................................................. 129
Connections
131
Viewing Photographs on TV............................................................................................. 132
Standard Definition Devices.............................................................................................132
High-Definition Devices.....................................................................................................133
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................................... 134
Before Connecting the Camera ...................................................................................... 134
Connecting the Camera .................................................................................................... 135
Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 136
Connecting the Printer ...................................................................................................... 136
Printing Pictures One at a Time ...................................................................................... 137
Printing Multiple Pictures ................................................................................................. 139
Creating Index Prints .......................................................................................................... 142
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set......................................................................... 143
Menu Guide
145
D The Playback Menu: ManagingImages............................................................................ 146
Playback Folder................................................................................................................ 146
Display Mode .................................................................................................................... 146
Image Review ................................................................................................................... 147
Rotate Tall .......................................................................................................................... 147
C The Shooting Menu: ShootingOptions............................................................................. 148
ISO Sensitivity Settings.................................................................................................. 149
Auto Distortion Control ................................................................................................ 150
Color Space........................................................................................................................ 150
Long Exp. NR..................................................................................................................... 151
High ISO NR ....................................................................................................................... 151
Active Folder..................................................................................................................... 152
A Custom Settings: Fine-TuningCameraSettings .................................................................. 153
A: Reset Custom Settings ............................................................................................ 154
a: Autofocus ........................................................................................................................... 155
a1: AF-area Mode............................................................................................................. 155
a2: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator................................................................................. 155
a3: Live View Autofocus................................................................................................ 155
a4: Rangefinder................................................................................................................ 156
b: Exposure............................................................................................................................. 156
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.................................................................................. 156
c: Timers/AE Lock................................................................................................................. 156
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ................................................................................ 156
c2: Auto off Timers.......................................................................................................... 157
c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 157
c4: Remote on Duration................................................................................................ 157
d: Shooting/Display............................................................................................................. 158
d1: Beep .............................................................................................................................. 158
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ......................................................................................... 158
d3: ISO Display.................................................................................................................. 158
d4: File Number Sequence........................................................................................... 159
d5: Exposure Delay Mode............................................................................................. 159
d6: Date Imprint............................................................................................................... 160
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d7: Live View Display Options .....................................................................................161
e: Bracketing/Flash...............................................................................................................162
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash ..................................................................................162
e2: Auto Bracketing Set .................................................................................................162
f: Controls ................................................................................................................................163
f1: Assign E/Fn Button ..................................................................................................163
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button .........................................................................................164
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation................................................................................................164
f4: No Memory Card? ......................................................................................................164
f5: Reverse Indicators......................................................................................................164
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.......................................................................................... 165
LCD Brightness..................................................................................................................166
Info Display Format.........................................................................................................166
Auto Information Display..............................................................................................168
Info Wrap-around ............................................................................................................168
Video Mode........................................................................................................................168
HDMI.....................................................................................................................................168
Time Zone and Date .......................................................................................................169
Language............................................................................................................................169
Image Comment ..............................................................................................................169
Auto Image Rotation ......................................................................................................170
Image Dust off Ref Photo..............................................................................................171
Eye-Fi Upload ....................................................................................................................173
Firmware Version .............................................................................................................173
N The Retouch Menu: CreatingRetouchedCopies ................................................................. 174
Creating Retouched Copies..............................................................................................175
D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................176
Red-Eye Correction..........................................................................................................176
Trim.......................................................................................................................................177
Monochrome.....................................................................................................................178
Filter Effects........................................................................................................................178
Color Balance.....................................................................................................................179
Small Picture......................................................................................................................180
Image Overlay ...................................................................................................................182
NEF (RAW) Processing ....................................................................................................184
Quick Retouch...................................................................................................................185
Straighten...........................................................................................................................185
Distortion Control............................................................................................................185
Fisheye.................................................................................................................................185
Color Outline .....................................................................................................................186
Perspective Control.........................................................................................................186
Stop-Motion Movie .........................................................................................................187
Side-by-Side Comparison .............................................................................................189
m Recent Settings/O My Menu....................................................................................... 190
m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings..............................................................190
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu.........................................................................191
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Notes
193
Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 194
Compatible CPU Lenses .................................................................................................... 194
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses .......................................................................................... 195
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 198
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ................................................................. 198
Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 202
Approved Memory Cards.................................................................................................. 203
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter........................................................ 204
Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 205
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 205
Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 205
The Low-Pass Filter.............................................................................................................. 206
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 210
Available Settings................................................................................................................. 212
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................................................... 215
Exposure Program................................................................................................................ 216
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 217
Display ..................................................................................................................................... 217
Shooting (All Modes).......................................................................................................... 218
Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................................................... 219
Playback .................................................................................................................................. 220
Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 220
Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 221
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 224
Battery Life ............................................................................................................................. 231
Index.......................................................................................................................................... 232
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions
where all those who use the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this
section are indicated by the following symbol:
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using
this Nikon product.
A
❚❚WARNINGS
Keep the sun out of the frame
Do not disassemble
A
A
Keep the sun well out of the frame when
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight
focused into the camera when the sun is
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury. In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified technician.
Should the product break open as the
result of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter and then
take the product to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
A
A
Using the viewfinder diopter control
Do not place the strap around the neck of an
infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the neck
of an infant or child could result in
strangulation.
A
A
When operating the viewfinder diopter
control with your eye to the viewfinder,
care should be taken not to put your
finger in your eye accidentally.
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual
smell coming from the equipment or AC
adapter (available separately), unplug
the AC adapter and remove the battery
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.
Continued operation could result in
injury. After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
A
Observe caution when using the flash
• Using the camera with the flash in close
contact with the skin or other objects
could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. Particular care should be
observed when photographing infants,
when the flash should be no less than
one meter (39 in.) from the subject.
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas
Do not use electronic equipment in the
presence of flammable gas, as this could
result in explosion or fire.
A
A
Avoid contact with liquid crystal
A
Should the monitor break, care should be
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes or mouth.
Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in injury.
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Observe proper precautions when handling
batteries
Observe proper precautions when handling the
quick charger
A
A
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling
batteries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use in
this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are using
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of the
plug should be removed with a dry
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.
• Do not handle the power cable or go
nearthe chargerduringthunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in electric shock.
• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug
or bend the power cable. Do not place
it under heavy objects or expose it to
heat or flame. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take the power cable to a
Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to
excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage to
the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use, attach
the terminal cover and store in a cool,
dry place.
• The battery may be hot immediately
after use or when the product has been
used on battery power for an extended
period. Before removing the battery
turn the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Do not handle the plug or charger with
wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in electric
shock.
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC
inverters. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the product
or cause overheating or fire.
Use appropriate cables
A
A
When connecting cables to the input and
output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
• Discontinue use immediately should
you notice any changes in the battery,
such as discoloration or deformation.
CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played back on
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs
on an audio CD player could cause
hearing loss or damage the equipment.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this
product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form,
by any means, without Nikon’s prior
written permission.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of this
product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring any
errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address
provided separately).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
specifications of the hardware and
software described in these manuals at any
time and without prior notice.
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide
D5000
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified that any
changes or modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by
Nikon for your equipment. Using other
interface cables may exceed the limits of
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to
the State of California to cause birth defects
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville,
New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
ATTENTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Notice for Customers in Europe
This symbol indicates that this
product is to be collected
separately.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• This product is designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• For more information, contact the retailer
or the local authorities in charge of waste
management.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• For more information, contact the retailer
or the local authorities in charge of waste
management.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it
with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to
also replace any pictures selected for preset manual white balance (0 99). Care should be
taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, AC adapters,
and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this
electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on
copies or reproductions of securities issued
by private companies (shares, bills, checks,
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do not
copy or reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by public
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,
coins, securities, government bonds, or
local government bonds, even if such
copies or reproductions are stamped
“Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage
stamps or post cards issued by the
government is prohibited.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted
creative works such as books, music,
paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,
drawings, movies, and photographs is
governed by national and international
copyright laws. Do not use this product for
the purpose of making illegal copies or to
infringe copyright laws.
The copying or reproduction of stamps
issued by the government and of certified
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:
•
•
•
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
X
This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera,
including the names of camera parts, how to use the camera menus, and how to
ready the camera for use.
X
Overview.........................................................................................................................
2
Getting to Know the Camera.......................................................................................
The Camera Body........................................................................................................................
The Mode Dial ..............................................................................................................................
The Viewfinder.............................................................................................................................
The Monitor...................................................................................................................................
The Information Display...........................................................................................................
3
3
5
6
7
8
The Command Dial..................................................................................................................... 10
The Power Switch........................................................................................................................ 12
Camera Menus ............................................................................................................... 13
Using Camera Menus................................................................................................................. 14
First Steps........................................................................................................................ 16
Charge the Battery ..................................................................................................................... 16
Insert the Battery ........................................................................................................................ 17
Attach a Lens ................................................................................................................................ 18
Basic Setup .................................................................................................................................... 20
Insert a Memory Card................................................................................................................ 22
Format the Memory Card......................................................................................................... 23
Adjust Viewfinder Focus........................................................................................................... 25
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get
the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and
keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.
❚❚Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and
conventions are used:
X
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to
prevent damage to the camera.
D
A
0
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the
camera.
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR
NIKON WARRANTY.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative
once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the
camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is
inspected or serviced.
A Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the
rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
11
1
2
X
21
22
3
4
5
12
6
7
8
13
14
23
24
15
16
17
9
25
10
18
19
20
1 Mode dial...................................5 8 Infrared receiver .................... 68 18 Lens release button...............19
2 Focal plane mark (E) ...........61 9 Body cap
3 R (information) button.........8 10 CPU contacts
19 Mirror...............................42, 208
20 Lens mount .............................61
Two-button reset button.....78
4 E (exposure compensation)
button ...................................90
N (aperture) button .............84
Flash compensation
11 Built-in flash............................ 70 21 Accessory shoe cover......... 198
12 M (flash mode) button ......... 70 22 Accessory shoe (for optional
Y (flash compensation)
button................................... 93
13 Eyelet for camera strap
flash unit)........................... 198
23 Accessory terminal ............. 203
24 USB connector
button ...................................93
5 Shutter-release button.........32
6 Power switch...........................28
7 AF-assist illuminator .............55
Self-timer lamp ......................68
Red-eye reduction lamp ......72
14 Microphone ............................ 51
15 Connector cover
16 E (self-timer) button ........... 69
Fn (function) button ...........163
17 Mounting index..................... 18
Connecting to a computer
............................................. 135
Connecting to a printer.. 136
A/V connector...................... 132
25 HDMI mini-pin connector
............................................. 133
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Camera Body (Continued)
2
11
1
12
13
14
15
3
X
4
5
6
16
17
18
19
7
8
9
20
21
22
10
1 Viewfinder eyepiece............. 25 7 W (thumbnail/playback
14 a (live view) button
zoom out) button.............122
Q (help) button.......................13
8 X (playback zoom in)
Taking photographs.......... 41
Shooting movies................ 49
15 Memory card slot cover....... 22
16 Multi selector ......................... 14
17 J (OK) button....................... 14
18 Memory card access lamp
..........................................22, 32
19 Speaker
2 DK-24 rubber eyecup
3 Monitor
Viewing settings ...................8
Live view .............................. 41
button .................................124
Viewing pictures ................ 39 9 P (information edit)
button ..................................... 9
Two-button reset button.....78
Deleting pictures ............... 40 10 Tripod socket
Full-frame playback......... 116
4 O (delete) button
Deleting pictures during
playback............................. 126
5 K (playback) button .. 39, 116
6 G (menu) button .... 13, 145
11 Diopter adjustment
control...................................25
12 A (AE-L/AF-L)
button ..........................59, 164
L (protect) button...........125
13 Command dial........................10
20 Power connector cover for
optional power connector
..............................................204
21 Battery-chamber cover latch
................................................ 17
22 Battery-chamber cover........ 17
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Mode Dial
The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes:
❚❚P, S, A, and M Modes
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.
P—Programmed auto (0 81): Camera chooses A—Aperture-priority auto (0 83): Adjust
shutter speed and aperture, user controls
other settings.
aperture to soften background details or
increase depth-of-field to bring both main
subject and background into focus.
X
S —Shutter-priority auto (0 82): Choose fast
M—Manual (0 84): Match shutter speed and
shutter speeds to freeze action, slow shutter aperture to your creative intent.
speeds to suggest motion by blurring
moving objects.
❚❚Auto Modes
Select these modes for simple, point-and-
shoot photography.
i Auto (0 28): Camera adjusts settings automati-
cally to produce optimal results with “point-and-
shoot” simplicity. Recommended for first-time
users of digital cameras.
j Auto (flash off) (0 28): As above, except that the
flash will not fire even when lighting is poor.
❚❚Scene Modes
Selecting a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene.
k Portrait (0 34): Shoot portraits with back- m Sports (0 34): Freeze motion for dynamic
ground in soft focus.
sports shots.
l Landscape (0 34): Preserve details in
landscape shots.
n Close up (0 35): Take vivid close-ups of
flowers, insects, and other small objects.
p Child (0 34): Create portraits of children. o Night portrait (0 35): Shoot portraits
Clothing and background details are vividly against a dimly-lit backdrop.
rendered while skin tones remain soft and
h (other scenes; 0 33): Other scenes can
natural.
be selected with the command dial.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Viewfinder
5
1
X
6 7
8
9
10 11
12 13 14
20
2
3
4
15
16
17 19
18
1 Framing grid (displayed when 12 Number of exposures
13 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) ........................... 29
14 Flash-ready indicator ........... 32
15 Flexible program
indicator............................... 81
16 Exposure indicator................ 85
Exposure compensation
display .................................. 90
17 Flash compensation
indicator............................... 92
18 Exposure compensation
indicator............................... 90
19 Auto ISO sensitivity
On is selected for Custom
Setting d2)......................... 158
2 Reference circle for center-
weighted metering ........... 88
3 “No memory card” indicator
4 Battery indicator ................... 28
5 Focus points ........................... 58
6 Focus indicator ................31, 61
7 Autoexposure (AE) lock
remaining ............................29
Number of shots remaining
before memory buffer
fills..........................................66
White balance recording
indicator ...............................99
Exposure compensation value
................................................90
Flash compensation
value......................................92
Capture mode indicator.....134
ISO sensitivity .........................74
indicator............................... 89
8 Shutter speed ..................82, 84
9 Aperture (f-number) ......83, 84
10 Battery indicator ................... 28
11 Bracketing indicator........... 103
indicator.............................149
20 Warning indicator ...............221
D No Battery
When the battery is exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder will
dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewfinder display will return
to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.
D The Viewfinder Display
Owing to the characteristics of this type of viewfinder display, you may notice fine lines
radiating outward from the selected focus point. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction.
D The Viewfinder
The response time and brightness of the viewfinder may vary with temperature.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Monitor
The monitor opens outwards 180° and can be rotated 180° left or 90° right as shown
below, allowing the monitor to be angled for high- and low-angle photography or
rotated to face the user for self-portraits (0 45).
X
180°
90°
180°
❚❚Shooting Position
In other situations, the monitor can be stowed on
the camera body by opening it outward and
rotating it 180° left before folding it back onto the
camera body. This position is recommended for
most shooting and playback.
❚❚Storage Position
To protect the monitor when the camera is not in
use, fold it back onto the camera body as shown at
right.
D Using the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown above. Do not use force. Failure to observe
these precautions could damage the connection between the monitor and the camera
body.
Adjust the monitor before mounting the camera on a tripod.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Information Display
Shooting information, including shutter speed, aperture, and
the number of exposures remaining, is displayed in the monitor
when the R button is pressed.
R button
Camera rotated 90° to shoot
X
Camera in normal orientation
in tall (portrait) orientation
34 33 32 31 30 29 28
1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28
1
3
6
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
2
7
16
17
13
15
14
19
18
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
27
26
25
24
8
Set
P
9
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
9
Set
P
23 22 20 21
1 Shooting mode
11 Flash mode..............................71 27 Image quality......................... 62
12 Exposure compensation......90 28 Battery indicator.................... 28
13 ADL bracketing ....................103 29 “Beep” indicator ..................158
14 Flash compensation..............92 30 Auto ISO sensitivity
i auto/
j auto (flash off) .............. 28
Scene modes ...................... 33
P, S, A, and M modes........... 80
2 Aperture (f-number) ......83, 84
3 Shutter speed ..................82, 84
4 Shutter-speed display.............9
5 Aperture display.......................9
6 Exposure/white balance
bracketing indicator........ 103
7 Exposure indicator................ 85
Exposure compensation
indicator............................... 91
Bracketing progress indicator
.............................................. 105
8 Auto-area AF indicator ........ 57
3D-tracking indicator........... 57
Focus point............................. 58
9 Help indicator ...................... 221
10 ADL bracketing indicator .... 105
indicator.............................149
31 Manual flash indicator .......162
Flash compensation indicator
for optional flash units ...200
32 Date imprint indicator .......160
33 GPS connection
15 Picture Control .....................106
16 Number of exposures
remaining ............................29
Capture mode indicator.....134
17 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)............................29
indicator.............................114
18 Bracketing increment.........104 34 Eye-Fi connection
indicator.............................173
19 Active D-Lighting ...................94
20 Metering ..................................88
21 AF-area mode.........................56
22 Focus mode.............................54
23 Release mode.........................65
24 ISO sensitivity .........................74
25 White balance ........................96
26 Image size ...............................64
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Changing Settings in the Information Display
To change settings for the items listed in the
information display, press the P button.
Highlight items using the multi selector and press
J to view options for the highlighted item. Some
items can also be adjusted using the command
dial and camera buttons (0 10).
P button
X
A The Shutter-Speed and Aperture Displays
These displays provide visual indications of shutter speed and aperture.
Fast shutter speed, large
aperture (small f-number).
Slow shutter speed, small
aperture (large f-number).
While the mode dial is rotated, this display is replaced by an image of the mode dial.
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear information from the display, press the R button again. Note that the monitor turns
off automatically while the shutter-release is pressed or if no operations are performed for
8 s (the default value). The information display can be restored by pressing the R button.
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c2 (Auto
off timers, 0 157). For information on choosing a design for the information display, see
Info display format, (0 166). For information on choosing whether information is
displayed when the shutter-release button is pressed; see Auto information display
(0 168). For information on choosing whether the cursor in the information display “wraps
around,” see Info wrap-around (0 168).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Command Dial
The command dial can be used with other controls to adjust a variety of settings
when shooting information is displayed in the monitor.
M button: flash mode and flash compensation
E button:
aperture,
exposure
compensation,
X
and flash
compensation
Fn (E) button: release mode,
image quality and size,
ISO sensitivity,
white balance,
Active D-Lighting,
or bracketing
Mode dial
Command dial
Choose a scene (h mode;
0 34).
h mode
Command dial
Command dial
Command dial
Command dial
Information display
Information display
Information display
Information display
Choose a combination of
aperture and shutter speed
(mode P; 0 81).
Mode P
Choose a shutter speed
(mode S or M; 0 82, 84).
Mode S or M
Choose an aperture
(mode A; 0 83).
Mode A
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose an
aperture
(mode M;
0 84).
+
+
+
Mode M
E button
E button
M button
Command dial
Command dial
Command dial
Information display
Information display
Information display
Set exposure
compensation
(mode P, S, or A;
0 90).
X
Mode P, S, or A
Choose a flash mode (0 71).
Adjust flash compensation (mode P, S, A, or M; 0 92).
+
+
P, S, A, or M
M button
E button
Command dial
Information display
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The role of the Fn (E) button can be selected using
Custom Setting f1 (Assign E/Fn button; 0 163),
allowing the following settings to be adjusted by
pressing the Fn (E) button and rotating the command
dial:
+
Fn (E) button
Command dial
Release mode (0 65)
ISO sensitivity (0 74)
Active D-Lighting (0 94)
Image quality and size
(0 62)
X
White balance (0 96)
Bracketing (0 103)
The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera
on.
Power switch
Power switch
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera
off.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can
be accessed from the camera menus. To view the
menus, press the G button.
G button
X
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 146)
• C: Shooting (0 148)
• A: Custom Settings (0 153)
• B: Setup (0 165)
• N: Retouch (0 174)
• m: Recent settings or My Menu (defaults to
Recent settings; 0 190)
Slider shows position in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
d
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the
monitor, help can be displayed by pressing the Qbutton.
A description of the currently selected option or menu
will be displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1 or
3 to scroll through the display.
Q button
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Camera Menus
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.
Move cursor up
J button: select highlighted item
Select highlighted item or
Cancel and return to
previous menu
display sub-menu
X
Move cursor down
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1 Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the menus.
G button
2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current
menu.
3 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to position the cursor in the
selected menu.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected
menu.
5 Highlight a menu item.
X
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
6 Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu
item.
7 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
8 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit
without making a selection, press the G
button.
Note the following:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button
halfway (0 32).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Steps
Charge the Battery
The camera is powered by an EN-EL9a rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied). To
maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-23 quick charger
before use. About one hour and forty minutes are required to fully recharge the
battery when no charge remains.
X
1 Plug the charger in.
Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery
charger and plug the power cable into an
electrical outlet.
2 Remove the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal cover from the battery.
h
h
A
W
1 0 8 0 m
E L
7 . 8
a
L 9
- E
. 2 V
7
Terminal
cover
3 Insert the battery.
7 . 8 W h
7 . 2 V 1 0 8 0 m A h
E L - E L 9 a
Insert the battery as shown in the illustration on
the charger. The CHARGE lamp will blink while the
battery charges.
Battery Charging
charging complete
4 Remove the battery when charging is
complete.
7 . 8 W h
7 . 2 V 1 0 8 0 m A h
E L - E L 9 a
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp
stops blinking. Remove the battery and unplug
the charger.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert the Battery
Power switch
1 Turn the camera off.
A Inserting and Removing Batteries
Always turn the camera off before inserting or
removing batteries.
X
2 Open the battery-chamber cover.
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the battery-chamber
cover.
w
q
3 Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown at right.
4 Close the battery-chamber cover.
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xii–xiii and 210–211 of this manual. Do
not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F).
Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best
results, charge the battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may
temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature
below the temperature at which it was charged.
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool before recharging.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is
removed. An AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens is used in this manual for
illustrative purposes.
Focal length index
Focal length scale
Lens cap
Mounting index
X
CPU contacts (0 194)
Rear lens cap
A-M mode switch (see below)
Focus ring (0 60, 229)
VR (vibration reduction) switch (0 19)
Zoom ring
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Remove the rear lens cap and the
camera body cap.
3 Attach the lens.
Keeping the mounting index on the
lens aligned with the mounting index
on the camera body, position the lens
in the camera’s bayonet mount (q).
Being careful not to press the lens-
release button, rotate the lens
counter-clockwise until it clicks into
place (w).
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or
M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or
M/A (autofocus with manual priority).
D Autofocus
Autofocus is supported with only AF-S and AF-I lenses, which are equipped with autofocus
motors. Autofocus is not available with other AF lenses.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses.
To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q)
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens,
replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
❚❚Vibration Reduction (VR)
X
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lenses support vibration reduction (VR),
which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,
allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of
55mm (Nikon measurements; effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).
To use vibration reduction, slide the VR switch to ON. Vibration
reduction is activated when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake on the
image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of framing
the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual modes.
When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied
only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera
smoothly in a wide arc.
Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF. Turn vibration
reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the
tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 194), lock aperture at the
minimum setting (highest f-number).
D Vibration Reduction
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power
to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not
a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction
is active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Setup
A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on.
Choose a language and set the time and date. Photographs can not be taken until
you have set the time and date.
Power switch
1 Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.
X
2 Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language
and press J.
3 Choose a time zone.
A time-zone selection dialog will be displayed.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the local time zone (the
UTC field shows the difference between the
selected time zone and Coordinated Universal
Time, or UTC, in hours) and press J.
4 Choose a date format.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the order in which the
year, month, and day will be displayed. Press J
to proceed to the next step.
5 Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Daylight saving time options will be displayed.
Daylight saving time is off by default; if daylight
saving time is in effect in the local time zone,
press 1 to highlight On and press J.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Set the date and time.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.
Press 4 or 2 to select an item, 1 or 3 to change.
Press J to set the clock and exit to shooting
mode.
A The Setup Menu
X
Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the Language (0 169)
and Time zone and date (0 169) options in the setup menu.
A The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an
optional EP-5 power connector and EH-5a AC adapter (0 204). Three days of charging will
power the clock for about a month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset.
Set the clock to the correct time and date.
A The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert a Memory Card
The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available separately).
Power switch
1 Turn the camera off.
A Inserting and Removing Memory Cards
Always turn the camera off before inserting or
removing memory cards.
X
2 Open the card slot cover.
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and open the
card slot (w).
3 Insert the memory card.
Holding the memory card as shown at right, slide
it in until it clicks into place. The memory card
GB
4.0
access lamp will light for a few seconds. Close
the memory card slot cover.
Front
D Inserting Memory Cards
Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards
could damage the camera or the card. Check to be
sure the card is in the correct orientation.
Access lamp
If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the camera after being
used or formatted in another device, format the card as described on page 23.
❚❚Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the
camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and
press the card in to eject it (q). The card can then be
GB
4.0
removed by hand (w).
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format the Memory Card
Memory cards must be formatted after being used or formatted in other devices.
Format the card as described below.
D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (0 134).
X
Power switch
1 Turn the camera on.
2 Display format options.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Format memory card in the setup
menu and press 2. For more information on
using the menus, see page 13.
G button
3 Highlight Yes.
To exit without formatting the memory card,
highlight No and press J.
4 Press J.
The message at right will be displayed while
the card is formatted. Do not remove the
memory card or remove or disconnect the
power source until formatting is complete.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards
from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the
camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage
the card.
X
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
A The Write Protect Switch
Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the
G B
4 . 0
“lock” position, photos can not be recorded or deleted and
the memory card can not be formatted. To unlock the
memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.
Write-protect switch
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual
differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before
framing pictures in the viewfinder.
Power switch
1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera
on.
X
2 Focus the viewfinder.
Slide the diopter adjustment control up and
down until the viewfinder display and focus
point are in sharp focus. When operating the
control with your eye to the viewfinder, be
careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in
your eye.
Focus point
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select single-servo autofocus
(AF-S; 0 54), single-point AF (c; 0 57), and the center focus point (0 58), and then frame
a high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control
to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be
further adjusted using optional corrective lenses (0 202).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Photography and Playback
s
This chapter outlines the basics of taking and viewing photographs in auto and scene
modes.
s
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)............................................... 28
Step 1: Turn the Camera On .................................................................................................... 28
Step 2: Select i or j Mode.................................................................................................... 30
Step 3: Frame the Photograph ............................................................................................... 30
Step 4: Focus................................................................................................................................. 31
Step 5: Shoot................................................................................................................................. 32
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)....................................................................... 33
k Portrait ....................................................................................................................................... 34
l Landscape ................................................................................................................................ 34
p Child ........................................................................................................................................... 34
m Sports ......................................................................................................................................... 34
n Close Up .................................................................................................................................... 35
o Night Portrait........................................................................................................................... 35
r Night Landscape .................................................................................................................... 35
s Party/Indoor............................................................................................................................. 35
t Beach/Snow............................................................................................................................. 36
u Sunset......................................................................................................................................... 36
v Dusk/Dawn............................................................................................................................... 36
w Pet Portrait ............................................................................................................................... 36
x Candlelight................................................................................................................................. 37
y Blossom ..................................................................................................................................... 37
z Autumn Colors ........................................................................................................................ 37
0 Food............................................................................................................................................. 37
1 Silhouette.................................................................................................................................. 38
2 High Key.................................................................................................................................... 38
3 Low Key ..................................................................................................................................... 38
Basic Playback................................................................................................................ 39
Deleting Unwanted Photographs......................................................................................... 40
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography
(i and j Modes)
This section describes how to take photographs in i (auto) mode, an
automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings
are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions, and
in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit. To
take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in
control of other settings, rotate the mode dial to j to select auto (flash off) mode.
s
Step 1: Turn the Camera On
Power switch
1 Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
After a brief pause while the camera cleans the
image sensor, the information display will
appear in the monitor.
2 Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the information
display or the viewfinder (if the monitor is off,
press the R button to view the information
display; if the monitor does not turn on, the
battery is exhausted and must be recharged).
Information display Viewfinder
Description
L
—
—
Battery fully charged.
Battery partially discharged.
K
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or
prepare to charge battery.
H
d
H
(blinks)
d
Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Charge or
(blinks) exchange battery.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Check the number of exposures
remaining.
The information display and viewfinder show the
number of photographs that can be stored on
the memory card. Check the number of
exposures remaining.
If there is not enough memory to store
additional photographs at current settings, a
warning will be displayed. No further pictures
can be taken until the memory card has been
replaced (0 22) or photographs have been
deleted (0 40, 126).
s
When enough memory remains on the memory
card to record a thousand or more pictures at
current settings, the number of exposures
remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded
down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is
room for 1,260 exposures, the exposure count
display will show 1.2 K).
A Auto Meter Off
At default settings, the viewfinder and information display will turn off if no operations are
performed for about eight seconds (auto meter off), reducing the drain on the battery. Press
the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display (0 32).
8 s
Exposure meters on
Exposure meters off
Exposure meters on
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 157).
A Image Sensor Cleaning
At default settings, the camera vibrates the low-pass filter covering the image sensor to
remove dust when the camera is turned on or off.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 2: Select i or j Mode
To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited,
photograph infants, or capture natural lighting under
low light conditions, rotate the mode dial to j.
Otherwise, rotate the mode dial to i.
Mode dial
s
j mode
i mode
Step 3: Frame the Photograph
1 Ready the camera.
When framing photographs in the viewfinder,
hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle
the camera body or lens with your left. Keep
your elbows propped lightly against your torso
for support and place one foot half a pace ahead
of the other to keep your upper body stable.
Hold the camera as shown at right when framing
photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.
In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is
poor; use of a tripod is recommended.
2 Frame the photograph.
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the
main subject in at least one of the 11 focus
points.
Focus point
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Using a Zoom Lens
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area
visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths
on the lens focal length scale index to zoom in, shorter focal
lengths to zoom out).
Zoom in
Zoom ring
Zoom out
s
Step 4: Focus
1 Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus. The camera will select the focus points
automatically. If the subject is poorly lit, the flash
may pop up and the AF-assist illuminator may
light.
2 Check the indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the
selected focus points will be briefly highlighted,
a beep will sound, and the in-focus indicator (I)
will appear in the viewfinder.
In-focus indicator
I
Description
Subject in focus.
Camera unable to focus using
autofocus. See page 55.
In-focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
I (blinks)
While the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, the number of exposures that can be
stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 66) will be
displayed in the viewfinder.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 5: Shoot
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down to release the shutter and record the
photograph. The access lamp next to the memory
card slot cover will light and the photograph will be
displayed in the monitor for a few seconds (to resume
shooting before the photograph clears from the
display, press the shutter-release button halfway). Do
not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the
power source until the lamp has gone out and recording
is complete.
Access lamp
s
A The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button
the rest of the way down.
A The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. If the flash is raised, photographs can only
be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-
ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging; remove your
finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try again.
To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its
closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks
into place.
A Using the Flash
For more information on using the flash, see page 70.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene,
making creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing
a picture, and shooting as described on pages 28–32.
❚❚The Mode Dial
The following scenes can be selected with the mode
dial:
Mode dial
Land-
Portrait scape
Night
Sports Close up portrait scenes
Other
s
Child
k
l
p
m
n
o h
❚❚hMode
When the mode dial is rotated to h, the following scenes can be selected by
rotating the command dial until the desired scene is shown in the information
display (0 8):
Command dial
Information display
Mode dial
Night
landscape
Party/indoor Beach/snow
Sunset
Dusk/dawn
Pet portrait
Candlelight
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Blossom
Autumn colors
Food
Silhouette
High key
Low key
y
z
0
1
2
3
A h Mode
The mode selected when the mode dial is rotated to h
can also be chosen using the Scene mode option in the
shooting menu (0 148).
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Scene Modes
kPortrait
pChild
s
Use for portraits with soft, natural-
looking skin tones. If the subject is far
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing
and background details are vividly
from the background or a telephoto lens rendered, while skin tones remain soft
is used, background details will be
softened to lend the composition a
sense of depth.
and natural.
lLandscape
mSports
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight. Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
dynamic sports shots in which the main
subject stands out clearly. The built-in
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
nClose Up
rNight Landscape
s
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, Reduce noise and unnatural colors when
and other small objects (a macro lens can photographing night landscapes,
be used to focus at very close ranges).
Use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blur.
including street lighting and neon signs.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur.
oNight Portrait
sParty/Indoor
Use for a natural balance between the
main subject and the background in
Capture the effects of indoor
background lighting. Use for parties and
portraits taken under low light. Use of a other indoor scenes.
tripod is recommended to prevent blur.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tBeach/Snow
vDusk/Dawn
s
Capture the brightness of sunlight
expanses of water, snow, or sand. The
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
Preserves the colors seen in the weak
natural light before dawn or after sunset.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
uSunset
wPet Portrait
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets Use for portraits of active pets. The AF-
and sunrises. The built-in flash and AF-
assist illuminator turn off; use of a tripod
is recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
assist illuminator turns off.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xCandlelight
zAutumn Colors
s
For photographs taken by candlelight.
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod autumn leaves. The built-in flash turns
is recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
off; use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blur when lighting is poor.
yBlossom
0Food
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
bloom, and other landscapes featuring
Use for vivid photographs of food. Use of
a tripod is recommended to prevent blur
expanses of blossoms. The built-in flash when lighting is poor; the flash can also
turns off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
be used (0 70).
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Silhouette
3Low Key
s
Silhouette subjects against bright
Use to create dark, somber images that
backgrounds. The built-in flash turns off; bring out highlights when shooting dark
use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blur when lighting is poor.
scenes. The built-in flash turns off; use of
a tripod is recommended to prevent blur
when lighting is poor.
2High Key
Use to create bright images that seem
filled with light when shooting bright
scenes. The built-in flash turns off.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Playback
At default settings, photographs are automatically displayed for about 4 s after
shooting. If no photograph is displayed in the monitor, the most recent picture can
be viewed by pressing the K button.
1 Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the
monitor.
s
K button
2 View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the command
dial.
To view additional information on the
current photograph, press 1 and 3 (0 117).
1/ 12
NIKON D5000
1
250 F11
200
35mm
AUTO 0,
0
_
100D5000
D
S
C
0001. JPG
:
15 04/2009 10 02 27
NOR AL
4288x2M848
:
/
To end playback and return to shooting
mode, press the shutter-release button
halfway.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O button.
Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.
1 Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to delete
as described on the preceding page.
s
2 Delete the photograph.
Press the O button. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; press the O button again to
delete the image and return to playback (to
exit without deleting the picture, press K).
O button
A Delete
To delete selected images (0 127), all images taken on a selected date (0 128), or all images
in the current playback folder (0 146), use the Delete option in the playback menu.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Framing Pictures in the Monitor
x
(Live View)
This chapter describes how to frame pictures in the monitor using live view.
x
Framing Photographs in the Monitor........................................................................ 42
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Framing Photographs in the Monitor
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor. The subject will no longer
be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
x
Item
Description
0
30, 33,
80
Shooting mode
“No movie” icon
Time remaining
The mode currently selected with the mode dial.
q
w
e
r
t
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
The amount of time remaining before live view ends
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.
50
46
43
43
Live view autofocus The current autofocus mode.
The current focus point. The display varies with the option
selected for autofocus mode (0 43).
Focus point
Audio recording
indicator
Time remaining
(movie mode)
Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies.
51
50
y
u
The recording time remaining in movie mode.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Choose an autofocus mode.
Press the P button and use the multi
selector to highlight the current autofocus
mode in the monitor. Press J to display the
following options (the default option differs
depending on the shooting mode; 0 78).
Highlight an option and press J.
P button
Mode
Description
The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait
subjects facing the camera. Use for portraits.
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait
subjects. Use the multi selector to select the focus point.
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod
is recommended.
8 Face priority
9 Wide area
x
! Normal area
" Subject tracking Track a selected subject as it moves through the frame.
A Live View Autofocus
The autofocus mode for live view autofocus can
also be chosen using Custom Settings a3 (Live
view autofocus, 0 155).
3 Choose the focus point.
Face priority: A double yellow border will be
displayed when the camera detects a portrait
subject facing the camera (if multiple faces,
Focus point
up to a maximum of five, are detected, the
camera will focus on the closest subject).
Wide area and normal area: Use the multi
selector to move the focus point to any point
in the frame.
Focus point
Subject tracking: Frame the subject in the
center of the monitor and press 1 to focus.
When the camera focuses, the focus point
will turn yellow and then start tracking the
selected subject as it moves through the
frame.
Focus point
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
Face priority: The camera sets focus and exposure for the
face in the double yellow border while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway; if the camera can no longer
detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has
looked away), borders will no longer be displayed.
Wide area and normal area: The camera focuses on the subject
in the selected focus point while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
x
Subject tracking: The camera focuses on the current subject.
To end tracking, press 1.
D Subject Tracking
Some time may be required for the camera to initiate focus. The
camera may be unable to track subjects if they are small, moving
quickly, or a similar color to the background, or if both the subject
and the background are very bright or very dark, the brightness
and color of the subject or background varies greatly, or the
subject visibly changes size.
The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten or darken while
the camera focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be
displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink
red. Note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point blinks red.
Check focus in the monitor before shooting.
5 Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down
to shoot. The monitor will turn off. When shooting is
complete, the photograph will be displayed in the monitor
for 4 s or until the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. The camera will then return to live view mode.
6 Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view mode.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Live View Display Options
Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below. The options available
depend on the setting selected for Custom Setting d7 (Live view display options; 0 161).
Show indicators
Hide indicators
Framing grid
Show shooting info
A Positioning the Monitor
The monitor can be adjusted for self-portraits or for low- or high-angle shots.
x
Low-angle shots
High-angle shots
Self-portraits
Frame shots with the camera
close to the ground.
Frame shots while holding
the camera over your head.
Monitor shows mirror image
of what will appear in final
picture.
A Exposure Compensation
In P, S, and A modes, exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV in increments of 1/3 EV (0 90). Note
that the effects of values over +3 EV or under –3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor.
A HDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the
camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display
the view through the lens as shown at right.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Shooting in Live View Mode
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, remove the
rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap before
shooting.
Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion may be visible in the
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned
horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear.
When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light
sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry.
Live view shooting ends automatically if the monitor is closed or the lens is removed.
x
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. Note, however, that
when used in live view mode for extended periods, the temperature
of the camera’s internal circuits may rise, resulting in image noise
and unusual colors (the camera may also become noticeably warm,
but this does not indicated a malfunction). To prevent damage to the camera’s internal
circuits, live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats. A count-
down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.
During live view, the camera displays the shutter speed and aperture in effect at the start of
live view. Exposure is metered again when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down.
To reduce blur when using a tripod, choose On for Custom Setting d5 (Exposure delay
mode).
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Autofocus is slower in live view. The camera may be unable to focus in the following
situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the
subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in
brightness
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable
to focus.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Manual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (0 60), rotate the
lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 6.7 ×
for precise focus, press the X button. While the view
through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner
of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to
areas of the frame not visible in the monitor
(available only if Wide area or Normal area is
selected for Live view autofocus), or press W to
zoom out.
x
X button
Navigation window
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Viewing Movies
y
This chapter describes how to record movies in live view.
Recording Movies.......................................................................................................... 50
Viewing Movies.............................................................................................................. 52
y
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded at 24 fps in live view mode.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror is raised and the view through the
lens is displayed in the monitor instead of the
viewfinder.
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0 42) indicates that movies can not be
a button
recorded.
A Modes A and M
Set aperture before recording in mode A or M.
y
2 Focus.
Frame the opening shot and press the shutter-release button
halfway. Shooting can not begin until the camera has focused.
Autofocus is not available after recording begins; use manual focus to
focus (0 60) during recording.
Recording indicator
3 Start recording.
Press J to start recording (at default settings,
both video and sound are recorded; do not cover
the microphone on the front of the camera
during recording). A recording indicator and the
time available are displayed in the monitor.
Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L
button (0 89) or (in P, S, and A) altered by up to
3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV using exposure compensation (0 90).
Time remaining
4 End recording.
Press J again to end recording (to end
recording and take a still picture in the mode
currently selected with the mode dial, press the
shutter-release button all the way down). Recording will end automatically
when the maximum size is reached or the memory card is full.
A Maximum Size
Each movie file can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum length is 5 min for movies with
a frame size of 1280 × 720, 20 min for other movies; note that depending on memory
card write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Movie Settings
To choose movie frame size and sound options:
1 Select Movie settings.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting
menu and press 2.
G button
2 Choose frame size and sound
recording options.
To choose a frame size, highlight Quality
and press 2. Highlight one of the following
options and press J to select:
y
Option
Frame size (pixels)
1280 × 720
640 × 424
Maximum length
3
4
5
1280×720 (16:9)
640×424 (3:2)
320×216 (3:2)
5 min.
20 min.
320 × 216
To turn sound recording on or off, highlight Sound and press 2. To record
monaural sound with movies, highlight On and press J. Select Off to record
silent movies.
D Recording Movies
Banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves
at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera
is panned. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. When
recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed. Unless the camera is connected to a TV,
recording will also end if the monitor is closed.
When used in live view or movie-recording mode for extended
periods, the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise,
resulting in image noise and unusual colors (the camera may also
become noticeably warm, but this does not indicated a malfunction). To prevent damage to
the camera’s internal circuits, recording will end automatically before the camera overheats.
A count-down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.
The camera may record the sound made by VR lenses when vibration reduction is on.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 116). The following
operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:
1 icon
Recording time
Audio indicator
To
Use
Description
Start/pause/
resume
J
Press J to start, pause, or resume playback.
y
Advance/
rewind
Press 4 or 2 to rewind or fast forward. While playback is
paused, press 4 or 2 to rewind or advance one frame.
Adjust volume
X/ W
Press X to increase volume, W to decrease.
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
See page 145 for more information.
Exittoshooting
mode
Display menus
G
Return to full-
frame playback
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More on Photography (All Modes)
z
This and the following two chapters build on the Tutorial to cover more advanced
shooting and playback options.
Focus................................................................................................................................ 54
Focus Mode................................................................................................................................... 54
AF-Area Mode .............................................................................................................................. 56
Focus Point Selection ................................................................................................................ 58
Focus Lock ..................................................................................................................................... 58
Manual Focus................................................................................................................................ 60 z
Image Quality and Size................................................................................................. 62
Image Quality............................................................................................................................... 62
Image Size...................................................................................................................................... 64
Release Mode ................................................................................................................. 65
Self-Timer and Remote Modes............................................................................................... 67
Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................................ 70
Flash Mode .................................................................................................................................... 71
ISO Sensitivity ................................................................................................................ 74
Interval Timer Photography........................................................................................ 76
Two-Button Reset .......................................................................................................... 78
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically or manually (see “Focus Mode,” below). The user
can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 60) or use focus lock
to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 58).
Focus Mode
Choose from automatic and manual focus modes.
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
z
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display focus-mode options.
Highlight the current focus mode in the
information display and press J.
3 Choose a focus mode.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J. Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in
modes P, S, A, and M.
Option
Auto-servo
AF
Description
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is
stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving.
AF-A
AF-S
AF-C
Single-servo For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button
AF is pressed halfway.
Continuous- For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-
servo AF release button is pressed halfway.
MF Manual focus Focus manually (0 60).
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Continuous-servo Autofocus
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera gives
priority to shutter response and the shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator is
displayed.
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 60) or use focus lock
(0 58) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the
photograph.
There is little or no
contrast between the
subject and the
background.
The focus point contains
areas of sharply
contrasting brightness.
Example: Subject is the
same color as the
background.
Example: Subject is half in
the shade.
z
The focus point contains
objects at different
distances from the
camera.
Background objects
appear larger than the
subject.
Example: a building is in
the frame behind the
subject.
Example: Subject is inside
a cage.
The subject contains many
fine details.
The subject is dominated
by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: A field of flowers
or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in
brightness.
Example: A row of
windows in a skyscraper.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light
automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway. The AF-assist illuminator will not
light during continuous-servo autofocus or manual focus, in
shooting modes in which the AF-assist illuminator can not be used,
or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting a2 (Built-in AF-assist
illuminator; 0 155). The illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0
m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with
a focal length of 18–200 mm and remove the lens hood.
AF-assist illuminator
A The Beep Speaker
Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 158) can be used to turn the beep speaker on or off.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display AF-area mode options.
Highlight the current AF-area mode in the
z
information display and press J.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
Option
Description
User selects focus point using multi selector (0 58); camera focuses
on subject in selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects.
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point manually (0 58),
but camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus
points if subject briefly leaves selected point. Use with erratically
moving subjects. In AF-S focus mode, user selects focus point manually
(0 58); camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only.
Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point.
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point using multi selector
(0 58). If subject moves after camera has focused, camera uses 3D-
tracking to select new focus point and keep focus locked on original
c Single point
Dynamic
d
area
e Auto-area
z
3D-tracking subject while shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If subject
(11 points) leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from shutter-release button
and recompose photograph with subject in selected focus point. In
AF-S focus mode, user selects focus point manually (0 58); camera
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.
f
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu
(0 155). AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other
than P, S, A, or M are reset when another shooting mode is selected.
A 3D-tracking (11 Points)
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the
focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus Point Selection
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-area modes other
than e Auto-area, you can choose from 11 focus points, making it possible to
compose photographs with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.
1 Choose an AF-area mode other than
e Auto area (0 56).
2 Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select the focus point in
the viewfinder or information display. Press J to
select the center focus area.
z
Focus point
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing in AF-A, AF-S, and
AF-C focus modes (0 54), making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in
a focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using
autofocus (0 55), you can also focus on another subject at the same distance and
then use focus lock to recompose the photograph. Focus lock is most effective when
an option other than e Auto-area is selected for AF-area mode (0 56).
1 Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator
(I) appears in the viewfinder.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release
button pressed halfway (q), press the AE-L/AF-L
button (w) to lock both focus and exposure (an
AE-L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder).
Focus will remain locked while the AE-L/AF-L
button is pressed, even if you later remove your
finger from the shutter-release button.
Shutter-release button
AE-L/AF-L button
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator
appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-
release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see
above).
z
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(AF-S) or keep the AE-L/AF-L button pressed,
allowing several photographs in succession to
be taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is
in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.
A The AE-L/AF-L Button
Custom Setting f2 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 164) controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L
button.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when you are not using an AF-S or AF-I lens or when
autofocus does not produce the desired results (0 55).
M/A-M
switch
1 Set the lens focus-mode switch.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch,
slide the switch to M.
A-M switch
2 Focus.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the
image displayed on the clear matte field in the
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at
any time, even when the image is not in focus.
z
A AF-S Lenses
Users of AF-S lenses (including the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens used in this
manual for illustrative purposes; 0 229) can select manual focus simply by setting the lens
focus-mode switch to M.
A M/A
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override, MF priority), manual focus can also
be selected by setting the camera focus mode to MF (manual focus; 0 54). Focus can then
be adjusted manually, regardless of the mode selected with the lens.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚The Electronic Rangefinder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether
the subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus
point can be selected from any of the 11 focus points).
After positioning the subject in the selected focus point,
press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the
lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
Note that with the subjects listed on page 55, the in-focus
indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is
not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before
shooting.
A Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your subject and the camera,
measure from the focal plane mark on the camera body. The
distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane
is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5mm
z
Focal plane mark
A The Exposure Indicator
If desired, the exposure indicator can be used to determine whether the focus point for
manual focus is in front of or behind the subject (0 156).
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
on the memory card (0 215).
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
z
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display image quality options.
Highlight the current image quality in the
information display and press J.
3 Choose a file type.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
Option
File type
Description
Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the
NEF memory card. Choose for images that will be processed on a
computer.
NEF (RAW)
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine
image quality).
JPEG fine
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal
image quality).
JPEG normal JPEG
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic
image quality).
JPEG basic
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
File type
Description
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-
quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-
JPEG normal JPEG quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-
quality JPEG image.
A NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.
White balance bracketing (0 103) and date imprint (0 160) are not available at image
quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2
(available separately; 0 202) or ViewNX (available on the supplied Software Suite CD). JPEG
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0 184).
A NEF (RAW)/NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal, or NEF
(RAW) + JPEG basic are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When
photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.
z
A File Names
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn
is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by
the camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF images,
“JPG” for JPEG images, or “AVI” for movies. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of
“NEF+JPEG” have the same file names but different extensions. Small copies created with
the small picture option in the retouch menu have file names beginning with “SSC_” and
ending with the extension “.JPG” (e.g., “SSC_0001.JPG”). Stop motion movies have file names
beginning with “ASC_” (e.g., “ASC_0001.AVI”); images recorded with the other options in the
retouch menu have file names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001. JPG”). Images
recorded with the Color space option in the shooting menu set to Adobe RGB (0 150) have
names that begin with an underscore (e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”).
A The Shooting Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option
in the shooting menu (0 148).
A The Fn Button
Image quality and size can also be adjusted by pressing the Fn (E) button and rotating the
command dial (0 163).
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels.
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display image size options.
Highlight the current image size in the
information display and press J.
z
3 Choose an image size.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
Image size
Large
Medium
Small
Size (pixels)
Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi
54.5 × 36.2 cm (21.4 × 14.2 in.)
40.8 × 27.1 cm (16.1 × 10.7 in.)
27.2 × 18.1 cm (10.7 × 7.1 in.)
4,288 × 2,848
3,216 × 2,136
2,144 × 1,424
A The Shooting Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the
shooting menu (0 148).
A The Fn Button
Image quality and size can also be adjusted by pressing the Fn (E) button and rotating the
command dial (0 163).
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Release Mode
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time, in a
continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay or remote control, or with
reduced camera noise.
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display release mode options.
Highlight the current release mode in the
information display and press J.
z
3 Choose a release mode.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
Mode
Description
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is
pressed.
Camera records about 4 frames per second while shutter-release
button is held down.
Use for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake
(0 67).
8
I
E
Single frame
Continuous
Self-timer
Optional ML-L3 wireless remote control required. Shutter is
released after two-second delay (0 67).
" Delayed remote
Quick-response Optional ML-L3 wireless remote control required. Shutter is
#
remote
released immediately (0 67).
As for 8 (single frame) except that camera makes no sound until
Quiet shutter- finger is removed from shutter-release button after shooting and
v
release
beep does not sound when camera focuses, keeping noise to a
minimum in quiet surroundings.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs
can be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the
memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buffer,
recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is
switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the
buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the
shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
A Continuous Release Mode
Continuous release mode (I) can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate the mode dial to
j (0 30) or turn the flash off (0 70–71).
A Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the viewfinder
exposure-count display while the shutter-release button is pressed. The illustration shows
the display when space remains in the buffer for about 21 pictures.
z
A Auto Image Rotation
The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst,
even if the camera is rotated during shooting. See “Auto Image Rotation” (0 170).
A See Also
For information on using the Fn (E) button and the command dial to select a release mode,
see page 163. For information on the number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst, see page 215.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Self-Timer and Remote Modes
The self-timer and optional ML-L3 wireless remote control (0 203) can be used to
reduce camera shake or for self-portraits.
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.
2 Select a release mode (0 65).
Select self-timer (E), delayed remote
("), or quick response release mode
(#).
3 Frame the photograph.
A Using a Remote Control
If autofocus is in effect in delayed remote or quick response release mode, the camera
can be focused by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (the shutter will not be
released if the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down).
z
A Cover the Viewfinder.
After framing the photograph, remove
the rubber eyecup (q) and insert the
supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown
(w). This prevents light entering via the
viewfinder interfering with exposure.
Hold the camera firmly when removing
the eyepiece cup.
DK-5 eyepiece cap
q
w
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Take the photograph.
Self-timer mode: Press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus, and
then press the button the rest of the
way down to start the self-timer. The
self-timer lamp will start to blink and a
beep will begin to sound. Two
seconds before the photograph is
taken, the self-timer lamp will stop
blinking and the beeping will become
more rapid. The shutter will be
released about ten seconds after the
timer starts.
The timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released.
Delayed remote and quick response modes:
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft.) or less,
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at
the infrared receiver on the camera
and press the shutter-release button
on the ML-L3. In delayed remote
z
mode, the self-timer lamp will light for
about two seconds before the shutter
is released. In quick-response remote
mode, the self-timer lamp will flash
after the shutter has been released. No
picture will be taken if the camera is
unable to focus or in other situations
in which the shutter can not be released.
If no operations are performed for about a minute after selecting delayed
remote or quick-response remote modes, the camera will automatically return
to single frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-release mode, cancelling remote
control mode.
Turning the camera off cancels self-timer and remote release modes and restores
single frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-release mode.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Before Using the Remote Control
Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery insulator
sheet.
D Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, M, or 0 modes, press the M button to raise
the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 70). Shooting will
be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer or delayed remote timer has started.
In auto or scene modes in which the flash pops up automatically, the flash will begin
charging when delayed remote or quick-response remote mode is selected; once the flash is
charged, it will automatically pop up and fire if required when the shutter-release button on
the ML-L3 is pressed. The camera will only respond to the shutter-release button on the
ML-L3 once the flash has charged. Only one photograph will be taken when the flash is used,
regardless of the number of shots selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0 157).
In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for
about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer
lamp will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp, which lights for one
second before the shutter is released to reduce red-eye.
z
A The E Button
Self-timer mode can also be selected by pressing the
E button (0 163).
E button
A See Also
For information on changing the duration of the self-timer and choosing the number of
shots taken, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0 157). For information on choosing the
length of time the camera will remain in standby mode before remote control mode is
cancelled, see Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration, 0 157). For information on
controlling the beeps that sound when the self-timer and remote control are used, see
Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 158).
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Built-in Flash
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit
subjects.
❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, p, n, o, s, and wModes
1 Choose a flash mode (0 71).
2 Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as required when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and
fire when a photograph is taken.
❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, M, and 0Modes
1 Raise the flash.
z
Press the M button to raise the flash.
2 Choose a flash mode (0 71).
This step can be omitted when shooting in 0
mode.
M button
3 Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
❚❚Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it
gently downward until the latch clicks into place.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash Mode
To choose a flash mode:
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display flash mode options.
Highlight the current flash mode in the
information display and press J.
z
3 Choose a flash mode.
Highlight a flash mode and press J.
i, k, p, n, s, w
o
0
Auto+slow sync+
red-eye reduction
No Auto
N
Fill flash
NYr
Auto+
red-eye reduction
NYo
Nr Auto+slow sync
Off
j
Off
j
P, A
Fill flash
S, M
N
N
Fill flash
Red-eye reduction
NY
Red-eye reduction
NY
NYp Slow sync+red-eye reduction
Np Slow sync
Nq Rear-curtain sync
Nq* Rear curtain+slow sync
* p appears in information display when setting is complete.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Flash Modes
The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following
settings, as shown by the flash mode icon:
•
AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit, flash pops up automatically
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required.
• Y (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires,
reducing “red-eye.”
• j (off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back-lit.
•
SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night
or under low light. Use to include background lighting in portraits.
REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind
moving light sources (below at right). If this icon is not displayed, flash will fire as the
shutter opens (front-curtain sync; the effect this produces with moving light sources is
shown below at left).
•
z
Front-curtain sync
Rear-curtain sync
A Choosing a Flash Mode
The flash mode can also be
selected by pressing the M
button and rotating the
command dial (in P, S, A, and M
modes, raise the flash before
using the M button to choose
the flash mode).
+
M button
Command
dial
Information display
A The Built-in Flash
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash, see page 196. Remove
lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not
be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for
several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash when vibration reduction
(VR) is not used.
Mode
i, k, p, s, w, P, A
Shutter speed
1/200–1/60 s
1/200–1/125 s
1/200–1 s
Mode
S
M
Shutter speed
1/200–30 s
1/200–30 s, bulb
n, 0
o
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
Range
200
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
400
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
800
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
—
1600
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
—
—
3200
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
—
—
—
m
ft.
1.0–12
0.7–8.5
0.6–6.1
0.6–4.2
0.6–3.0
0.6–2.1
0.6–1.5
0.6–1.1
0.6–0.8
3ft. 3in.–39ft. 4in.
2ft. 4in.–27ft. 11in.
2ft.–20ft.
2ft.–13ft. 9in.
2ft.–9ft. 10in.
2ft.–6ft. 11in.
2ft.–4ft. 11in.
2ft.–3ft. 7in.
2ft.–2ft. 7in.
z
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISO Sensitivity
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity,
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller
apertures.
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display ISO sensitivity options.
z
Highlight the current ISO sensitivity in the
information display and press J.
3 Choose an ISO sensitivity.
Highlight an option and press J. ISO sensitivity
can be set between values roughly equivalent to
ISO 200 and ISO 3200 in steps equivalent to
1/3 EV. For special situations, ISO sensitivity can
be lowered below ISO 200 by about 0.3 EV
(Lo 0.3, equivalent to ISO 160), 0.7 EV (Lo 0.7, equivalent to ISO 125), or 1.0 EV
(Lo 1, equivalent to ISO 100), or raised above ISO 3200 by about 0.3 EV (Hi 0.3,
equivalent to ISO 4000), 0.7 EV (Hi 0.7, equivalent to ISO 5000), or 1.0 EV (Hi 1,
equivalent to ISO 6400). Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option, which
allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting
conditions.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A AUTO
If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in another
mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.
A Hi 0.3–Hi 1
Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion.
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1
Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in
most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended.
A The Shooting Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity
settings option in the shooting menu (0 149).
A See Also
For information on enabling auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, or M modes, see page 149.
For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at
high ISO sensitivities, see page 151. For information on displaying ISO sensitivity in the
viewfinder, see page 158. For information on using the Fn (E) button and the command dial
to select ISO sensitivity, see page 163.
z
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.
1 Select Interval timer shooting.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight the shooting menu tab (C) and
press 2 to display the shooting menu, then
highlight Interval timer shooting and
press 2.
G button
2 Select a starting trigger.
Choose from the following starting triggers:
•
To start shooting immediately, highlight Now and
press 2. Shooting begins about 3 s after
settings are completed (proceed to Step 4).
To choose a starting time, highlight Start time and
press 2 (see Step 3).
•
z
3 Choose a start time.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours or minutes; press
1 or 3 to change. The starting time is not
displayed if Now is selected for Choose start
time. Press 2 to continue.
4 Choose an interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or
seconds; press 1 or 3 to change. Choose an
interval longer than the slowest anticipated
shutter speed. Press 2 to continue.
5 Choose the number of intervals.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of intervals;
press 1 or 3 to change. Press 2 to continue.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Start shooting.
Highlight Start > On and press J (to return to
the shooting menu without starting the interval
timer, highlight Start > Off and press J). The
first shot will be taken at the specified starting
time, or after about three seconds if Now was
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. The self-timer lamp blinks while
shooting is in progress; shooting will continue at the selected interval until all
shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed
to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, the interval
between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.
D Before Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view
the results in the monitor. To ensure that shooting starts at the desired time, check that the
camera clock is correctly set (0 20). Settings can not be changed while interval timer
photography is in progress.
z
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the EN-EL9a battery is fully charged or use
an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector.
D Bracketing
Bracketing can not be used with interval timer shooting.
A Cover the Viewfinder
Before starting the interval timer, remove the
rubber eyecup (q) and insert the supplied
DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown (w). This
prevents light entering via the viewfinder
interfering with exposure. Hold the camera
firmly when removing the eyepiece cup.
DK-5 eyepiece cap
q
w
A Release Mode
Regardless of the mode selected, the camera automatically takes one photograph at each
interval; the self-timer and remote control can not be used. Camera noise is reduced in quiet
shutter-release mode.
A Interrupting Interval Timer Shooting
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the mode dial to another
position. Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt interval timer
shooting.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-Button Reset
The camera settings listed below can be restored to
default values by holding the R and P buttons down
together for more than two seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot). The information display turns off
briefly while settings are reset.
R button
P button
Option
Image quality (0 62)
Image size (0 64)
White balance (0 96)
Fine tuning (0 98)
ISO sensitivity (0 74)
Auto and scene modes
P, S, A, M
Release mode (0 65)
Focus mode (0 54)
Live view autofocus (0 43)
i, k, p, o
j, l, m, r, s, t, u, v, w,
x, y, z, 1, 2, 3, P, S, A, M
n, 0
AF-area mode (0 56)
l, n, r, t, u, v, x, y, z,
0, 1, 2, 3
Default
JPEG normal
Large
Option
Focus point (0 58) 1
Metering (0 88)
Default
Center
Matrix
Off
Auto
Off
Auto
0
AE-L/AF-L button hold (0 89)
Active D-Lighting (0 94)
Bracketing (0 103)
Picture Control
AUTO
200
Single frame
AF-A
None
Off
modifications (0 106) 2
Flash compensation (0 92)
Exposure compensation
(0 90)
z
Off
Flash mode (0 71)
i, k, p, n, w
Face priority
Wide area
Auto
Auto+red-eye
reduction
Auto slow sync
Fill flash
s
Normal area
o
0, P, S, A, M
Flexible program (0 81)
Single point
Off
1 Focus point not displayed if Auto-area is
selected for AF-area mode.
2 Current Picture Control only.
m, w
Dynamic area
Auto-area
i, j, k, p, o, s, P, S, A, M
D Live View
Two-button reset is not available in live view.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P, S, A, and M Modes
t
P, S, A, and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings, including shutter
speed and aperture, metering, flash compensation, and white balance.
Shutter Speed and Aperture ....................................................................................... 80
Mode P (Programmed Auto)................................................................................................... 81
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)............................................................................................... 82
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)........................................................................................... 83
Mode M (Manual)........................................................................................................................ 84
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) .............................................................................. 86
Exposure ......................................................................................................................... 88
Metering......................................................................................................................................... 88
Autoexposure Lock..................................................................................................................... 89
Exposure Compensation.......................................................................................................... 90
Flash Compensation .................................................................................................................. 92
Active D-Lighting........................................................................................................................ 94
t
White Balance ................................................................................................................ 96
Fine-Tuning White Balance...................................................................................................... 98
Preset Manual............................................................................................................................... 99
Bracketing....................................................................................................................... 103
Picture Controls ............................................................................................................. 106
Selecting a Picture Control...................................................................................................... 106
Modifying Existing Picture Controls..................................................................................... 108
Creating Custom Picture Controls ........................................................................................ 111
Sharing Custom Picture Controls .......................................................................................... 113
The GP-1 GPS Unit ......................................................................................................... 114
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter
speed and aperture:
Mode
Description
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which
there is little time to adjust camera settings.
Programmed auto
(0 81)
P
S
Shutter-priority auto User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best
(0 82)
results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best
results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and
background into focus.
Aperture-priority auto
(0 83)
A
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed
to “bulb” or “time” for long time-exposures.
M
Manual (0 84)
D Lens Aperture Rings
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 194), lock the aperture ring at the
minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture
ring.
t
A Shutter Speed and Aperture
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and
aperture. Fast shutter speeds and larger apertures freeze moving objects and soften
background details, while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and
bring out background details.
Shutter speed
Aperture
Fast shutter speed
Slow shutter speed
(1 s)
Small aperture (f/22) Large aperture (f/5.6)
(Remember, the higher the f-number, the
smaller the aperture.)
(1/1,600 s)
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and
other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed
and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto:
Mode dial
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
A Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed
and aperture can be selected by rotating the
command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial
to the right for large apertures (low f-numbers) that
blur background details or fast shutter speeds that
“freeze” motion. Rotate the dial to the left for small
t
Command dial
apertures (high f-numbers) that increase depth of
field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All
combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)
indicator appears in the viewfinder and information display. To restore default shutter speed
and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed,
choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
A The Exposure Program
See page 216 for information on the built-in exposure program.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Use slow
shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, fast shutter speeds to
“freeze” motion.
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)
Slow shutter speed (1 s)
Mode dial
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.
t
2 Choose a shutter speed.
Shutter speed is shown in the viewfinder and
information display. Rotate the command
dial to choose the desired shutter speed
from values between 30 s and 1/4,000 s.
Command dial
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically
selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. Large apertures
(low f-numbers) reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind and in front of the
main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing out
details in the background and foreground. Short field depths are generally used in
portraits to blur background details, long field depths in landscape photographs to
bring the foreground and background into focus.
Small aperture (f/22)
Large aperture (f/5.6)
Mode dial
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.
t
2 Choose an aperture.
Aperture is shown in the viewfinder and
information display. Rotate the command
dial to choose the desired aperture from
values between the minimum and
maximum for the lens.
Command dial
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode M (Manual)
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take
photographs in manual exposure mode:
Mode dial
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Checking the exposure indicator (085), adjust shutter speed and aperture.
Shutter speed is selected by rotating the command dial: choose from values
between 30 s and 1/4,000 s or select “bulb” to hold the shutter open indefinitely
for a long time-exposure (086). Aperture is selected by pressing the N (E)
button and rotating the command dial: choose from values between the
minimum and maximum for the lens. Shutter speed and aperture are shown in
the viewfinder and information display.
t
Shutter speed
Aperture
Command
N(E) button Command
dial
dial
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Exposure Indicator
If a CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the
exposure indicator in the viewfinder and information display shows whether the
photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option
chosen for Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.; 0156), the amount of under-
or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. If the limits of the exposure
metering system are exceeded, the indicator will flash.
Custom Setting b1 set to 1/3 step
Optimal exposure
Underexposed by 1/3 EV
Overexposed by over 2 EV
A Reverse Indicators
If
(V) (the default setting) is selected for Custom Setting f5 (Reverse
indicators, 0164), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and information display are
displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select
(W) to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right.
t
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Shutter speeds of “bulb” and “time” can be used
for long time-exposure photographs of moving
lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. To
prevent blurring caused by camera shake, use a
tripod and an optional remote control or remote
cord (0203).
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
Shutter speed
Description
Shutter remains open while shutter-release button is held down. Tripod and
optional MC-DC2 remote cord are recommended to prevent blur.
Bulb
Optional ML-L3 wireless remote control required (0203). Shutter opens when
shutter-release button on remote control is pressed and remains open for thirty
minutes or until shutter-release button is pressed a second time.
Time
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent
loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged EN-EL9a
battery or an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector. Note that
noise may be present in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the
Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu (0148). If you are using an
optional remote cord, attach it to the camera.
t
Mode dial
2 Rotate the mode dial to M.
3 Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial until “Bulb”
(A) appears in the viewfinder or
information display. For a shutter speed of
“Time” (&), select delayed remote or quick-
response remote mode after choosing the
Command dial
shutter speed (065).
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote
cord all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until the
exposure is complete. If you are using a remote cord, see the manual provided
with the product for more information.
Time: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.
The shutter will open immediately (quick-response remote) or two seconds
after the shutter-release button is pressed (delayed remote) and remain open
until the button is pressed a second time.
5 Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.
Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes.
A Self-timer Mode
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of “Bulb” is equivalent to approximately 1/10 s.
t
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in other modes, the
camera selects the metering method automatically).
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display metering options.
Highlight the current metering method in the
t
information display and press J.
3 Choose a metering method.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
Method
Matrix
Description
Produces natural results in most situations. Camera uses 420-pixel RGB
sensor to meter a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G or D lenses
(0194), range information (3D color matrix metering II; with other CPU
lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II, which does not include 3D
range information).
L
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.
Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Camera meters current focus point; use to meter off-center subjects (if
Auto-area is selected for AF-area mode as described on page 56, camera
will meter center focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly
exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.
Center-
weighted
M
N
Spot
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure:
1 Select center-weighted (M) or spot (N) metering
(088).
Matrix metering (L) will not produce the desired results.
Shutter-release
button
2 Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press
the shutter-release button halfway. With the shutter-
release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned
in the focus point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus
and exposure.
t
AE-L/AF-L button
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will
appear in the viewfinder.
3 Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the
metered value for exposure:
Mode
Setting
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 081)
Shutter speed
Programmed auto
Shutter-priority auto
Aperture-priority auto
Aperture
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.
A See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0156), exposure will
lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the
role of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f2 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0164).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the
camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with
center-weighted or spot metering (088).
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display exposure compensation options.
Highlight exposure compensation in the
information display and press J.
t
3 Choose a value.
Highlight a value and press J. Exposure
compensation can be set to values between
–5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure)
in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, choose
positive values to make the subject brighter,
negative values to make it darker.
–1 EV
No exposure compensation
+1 EV
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0. Exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The E Button
Exposure compensation can also be
set by pressing the E button and
rotating the command dial. The
selected value is shown in the
viewfinder and information display.
E button Command dial
–0.3 EV
+2 EV
A Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and
aperture do not change.
A Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash
level.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure
compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0156). For
information on automatically varying exposure over a series of photographs to “bracket” a
selected exposure compensation value, see “Bracketing” (0103).
t
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the
camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display flash compensation options.
Highlight flash compensation in the information
t
display and press J.
3 Choose a value.
Highlight a value and press J. Flash
compensation can be set to values between
–3 EV (darker) and +1 EV (brighter) in increments
of 1/3 EV. In general, choose positive values to
make the subject brighter, negative values to
make it darker.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0.0. Flash
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Y (M) and E Buttons
Flash compensation can also be set by
rotating the command dial while
pressing the Y (M) and E buttons.
The selected value is shown in the
viewfinder and information display.
Y (M) button
E button
Command dial
–0.3 EV
+1 EV
A Optional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with an optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, or
SB-R200 flash units.
A Exposure Increments
For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash
compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0156).
t
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with
matrix metering (L; 088).
Active D-Lighting: XOff
Active D-Lighting: G Auto
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
t
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display Active D-Lighting options.
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the information
display and press J.
3 Choose an option.
Highlight G Auto, H Extra high, P High,
Q Normal, R Low, or X Off and press J.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (graininess, banding, and mottling) may appear in photographs taken with Active
D-Lighting at high ISO sensitivities. If center-weighted or spot metering is selected, settings
other than X Off are equivalent to Q Normal. In mode M, an Active D-Lighting setting of
G Auto is equivalent to Q Normal.
D “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to
optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0174)
optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting.
A The Shooting Menu
Active D-Lighting can also be adjusted using the Active D-Lighting
option in the shooting menu (0148).
A See Also
For information on using the Fn (E) button and command dial to
select Active D-Lighting, see page 163. For information on
automatically varying Active D-Lighting over two photographs
(one with Active D-Lighting off, the second with the current setting
for Active-D-Lighting), see page 103.
t
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; in P, S, A, and M modes,
other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source:
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display white balance options.
Highlight the current white balance setting in
the information display and press J.
t
3 Choose a white balance option.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
v Auto
H
N
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
M
Shade
J
Incandescent
Fluorescent (097)
L Preset manual (099)
I
G
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Shooting Menu
White balance can be selected using the White balance option in
the shooting menu (0148), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (098) or measure a value for preset white balance
(099).
The I Fluorescent option in the White balance menu can be used
to select the light source from the bulb types shown at right.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–
5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following
color temperatures:
t
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2,700 K
• J (incandescent)/
I (warm-white fluorescent): 3,000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3,700 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent): 4,200 K
• I (day white fluorescent): 5,000 K
• H (direct sunlight): 5,200 K
• N (flash): 5,400 K
• G (cloudy): 6,000 K
• I (daylight fluorescent): 6,500 K
• I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7,200 K
• M (shade): 8,000 K
A The Fn Button
For information on using the Fn (E) button and the command dial for white balance, see
page 0163.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is
fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu.
1 Display white balance options.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight White balance in the shooting
menu and press 2to display white balance
options.
G button
2 Select a white balance option.
Highlight an option other than Preset
manual and press 2(if Fluorescent is
selected, highlight a lighting type and press
2). The fine-tuning options shown at right
will be displayed. Fine-tuning is not
available with Preset manual white balance.
Coordinates
Adjustment
t
Increase green
3 Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white
balance.
Increase
blue
Increase
amber
Increase magenta
A White Balance Fine Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the
cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected will
make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
4 Press J.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two
methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Measure
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo
and white balance measured by camera (see below).
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0102).
❚❚Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1 Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the
final photograph.
2 Display white balance options.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight White balance in the shooting
menu and press 2to display white balance
options.
t
G button
3 Select Preset manual.
Highlight Preset manual and press 2.
4 Select Measure.
Highlight Measure and press 2. The menu
shown at right will be displayed; highlight
Yes and press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed before the camera enters preset
measurement mode.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the camera is ready to measure white
balance, a flashing D (L) will appear in
the viewfinder and information display.
5 Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder
and press the shutter-release button all the
way down. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured
accurately even when the camera is not in focus.
6 Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a value for
white balance, the message shown at right
will be displayed and a will flash in the
viewfinder for about eight seconds before
the camera returns to shooting mode. To
return to shooting mode immediately, press
the shutter-release button halfway.
t
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure white
balance. A message will appear in the
information display and a flashing b a
will appear in the viewfinder. Press the
shutter-release button halfway to return to
Step 4 and measure white balance again.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Measuring Preset White Balance
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode
will end when the exposure meters turn off. The auto meter-off delay can be changed using
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0157). The default setting is eight seconds.
D Preset White Balance
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time; the existing value will
be replaced when a new value is measured. When shooting in mode M, check the exposure
indicator to ensure that the subject is neither under- nor over-exposed (085).
A Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset white balance in the
information display (096), press J for a few seconds. If white balance has been assigned to
the Fn (E) button (0163) and preset white balance selected by pressing the Fn (E) button
and rotating the command dial, the camera will also enter preset measurement mode if the
Fn (E) button is pressed for a few seconds.
A Studio Settings
In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object when measuring
preset white balance.
t
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the
memory card.
1 Select Preset manual.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight White balance in the shooting
menu and press 2to display white balance
options. Highlight Preset manual and press
2.
G button
2 Select Use photo.
Highlight Use photo and press 2.
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2(to skip
the remaining steps and use the image last
selected for preset white balance, select This
image).
t
4 Choose a folder.
Highlight the folder containing the source
image and press 2.
5 Highlight the source image.
To view the highlighted image full frame,
press and hold the X button.
6 Copy white balance.
Press J to set preset white balance to the
white balance value for the highlighted
photograph.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance slightly
with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different
settings for the same subject.
1 Choose a bracketing option.
Press the G button to display the menus,
highlight Custom Setting e2 (Auto
bracketing set), and press 2.
G button
Highlight one of the following options and
press J.
t
Option
Description
AE bracketing Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.
k
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates three images,
each with a different white balance. Not available at image quality
settings that include NEF (RAW).
WB
m bracketing
ADL
bracketing
Take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off, the other at the
current setting for Active D-Lighting.
!
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If On is selected for ISO sensitivity auto control
(0149) in modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum
exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded. In mode M, shutter
speed will only be changed after the camera has adjusted ISO sensitivity.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
R button
Information display
P button
3 Display bracketing options.
Highlight the indicator for the selected
bracketing mode and press J.
4 Select a bracketing increment.
AE bracketing: Highlight a bracketing
t
increment and press J. Choose from values
between 0.3 EV (AE 0.3) and 2.0 EV (AE 2.0).
WB bracketing: Highlight a bracketing
increment and press J. Choose from increments of 1 (WB 1), 2 (WB 2), and 3
(WB 3).
ADL bracketing: Highlight ADL and press J.
A The Fn (E) Button
Bracketing increment selection can also be assigned to the Fn (E) button (0163).
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
AE bracketing: The camera will vary exposure
with each shot. The first shot will be taken at
the value currently selected for exposure compensation. The bracketing
increment will be subtracted from the current value in the second shot and
added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified values can
be higher or lower than the maximum and minimum values for exposure
compensation and are reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and
aperture. Bracketing ends automatically after the third shot is taken.
1st shot: unmodified
2nd shot: exposure reduced 3rd shot: exposure increased
A The Bracketing Progress Indicator
During AE bracketing, progress is shown by the bracketing
indicator in the information display:
t
• v: Camera ready to take first shot.
• w: Camera ready to take second shot.
• x: Camera ready to take third shot.
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies, one at the current
white balance setting, one with increased amber, and one with increased blue.
If there is not enough space available on the
memory card to record three images, the
exposure count display in the viewfinder will
flash. Shooting can begin when a new
memory card is inserted.
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is taken with Active
D-Lighting off, the second at the current Active D-Lighting setting (094; if
Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set
to Auto). Bracketing ends automatically after the second shot.
In continuous release mode, shooting will pause after each bracketing cycle. If the
camera is turned off before all shots in the bracketing sequence have been taken,
bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is
turned on. To cancel bracketing before all frames have been recorded, rotate the
mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among
compatible devices and software.
Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers six preset Picture Controls. In P, S, A, and M modes, you can choose
a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene (in other modes, the
camera selects a Picture Control automatically).
1 Place the cursor in the information display.
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.
t
R button
Information display
P button
2 Display preset Picture Controls.
Highlight the current Picture Control in the
information display and press J.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Choose a Picture Control.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J.
Option
Description
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most
situations.
Q Standard
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that
will later be extensively processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for
photographs that emphasize primary colors.
R Neutral
S Vivid
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
e Portrait
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
A The Shooting Menu
Picture Controls can also be selected and modified from the shooting
menu (0148). Set Picture Control can be used to modify existing
Picture Controls (0108). Choose Manage Picture Control to create
custom Picture Controls (0111) or copy custom Picture Controls to a
memory card to be shared among compatible devices and software
(0113).
t
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Existing Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modified to
suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced
combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make manual
adjustments to individual settings.
1 Display the Picture Control menu.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control and
press 2.
t
3 Adjust settings.
Press 1or 3to highlight the desired setting
and press 4or 2to choose a value (0109).
Repeat this step until all settings have been
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a
preset combination of settings. Default
settings can be restored by pressing the O
button.
4 Press J.
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Picture Control Settings
Option
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect
of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).
For example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid.
Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening
Quick adjust
Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between
0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or
choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent
highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast
Contrast
subjects). Not available when Active D-Lighting (094) is on; reset if Active
D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not
Brightness affect exposure. Not available when Active D-Lighting (094) is on; reset if
Active D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically
Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3
(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
t
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,
blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to
Hue
make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Filter
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose
effects
from OFF (the default setting), yellow, orange, red, and green (0110).
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-
white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green,
Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple (0110).
Toning
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in
the frame.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the X button in Step 3 displays a Picture Control grid
showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control
in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed
when Monochrome is selected). Release the X button to return to
the Picture Control menu.
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear
parallel to the axes of the grid.
A Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu
indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
t
Option
Yellow
Description
Y
O
R
G
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in
Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red
more contrast than orange.
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Red
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those
produced by physical glass filters.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3when Toning is selected displays saturation options.
Press 4or 2to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as
custom Picture Controls.
1 Select Manage Picture Control.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3 Select a Picture Control.
t
Highlight an existing Picture Control and
press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 and
save a copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further modification.
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 109 for more information. To
abandon any changes and start over, press
the O button. Press J when settings are
complete.
5 Select a destination.
Highlight a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press
2.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Name the Picture Control.
The text-entry dialog shown at right will be
displayed. By default, new Picture Controls
are named by adding a two-digit number
(assigned automatically) to the name of the
existing Picture Control. This name can be
edited to create a new name of up to 19
characters as described on page 152.
Keyboard area
Name area
The new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
A Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time
using the Rename option in the Manage Picture
Control menu.
t
A Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control
menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture
Controls when they are no longer needed.
A Custom Picture Controls
The edit display for custom Picture Controls contains
the same options as the original preset Picture Control
on which it is based. The original control is shown by
an icon in the top right corner of the display.
Original Picture
Control icon
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with
ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and
then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the
memory card, or to delete Custom Picture Controls
from the memory card, highlight Load/Save in the
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
•
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from
the memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1
through C-9 on the camera and name them as
desired.
•
Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture
Controls from the memory card. The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be displayed before a
Picture Control is deleted; to delete the selected
Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) from the camera to a selected
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.
t
•
A Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset
Picture Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome,
Portrait, and Landscape) can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GP-1 GPS Unit
The GP-1 GPS unit (available
separately) can be connected to the
camera’s accessory terminal using the
cable supplied with the GP-1, allowing
information on the camera’s current
position to be recorded when
photographs are taken. Turn the
camera off before connecting the GP-1;
for more information, see the GP-1
manual.
When the camera establishes communication with the
GP-1, a h icon will appear in the information display.
Photo information for pictures taken while the h
icon is displayed will include an additional page of GPS
data (0121). GPS data are only recorded when the
h
icon is displayed; confirm that the icon appears in the
information display before shooting (a flashing icon indicates that the GP-1 is searching
for a signal; pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data). If no data
are received from the GP-1 for two seconds, the h icon will clear from the display
and the camera will stop recording GPS information.
t
❚❚Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
•
Auto meter off: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when
the GP-1 is attached.
Option
Description
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the
time given in Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0157). This reduces the drain
on the battery, but GPS data may not be recorded if the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down without pausing.
Enable
Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP-1 is connected; GPS data will always
be recorded.
Disable
•
Position: This item is only available if the GP-1 is connected,
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by the GP-1.
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More on Playback
I
This chapter describes how to view photographs and details the operations that can
be performed during playback.
Full-Frame Playback...................................................................................................... 116
Photo Information ...................................................................................................................... 117
Thumbnail Playback ..................................................................................................... 122
Calendar Playback......................................................................................................... 123
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ....................................................................... 124
Protecting Photographs from Deletion .................................................................... 125
Deleting Photographs .................................................................................................. 126
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback............................................................... 126
The Playback Menu .................................................................................................................... 127
I
Slide Shows..................................................................................................................... 129
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button.
The most recent photograph will be displayed in
the monitor.
K button
To
Use
Description
Viewadditional
photographs
Press 2to view photographs in order recorded, 4to view
photographs in reverse order.
View photo
information
Press 1or 3to view information about current photograph
(0117).
View
W
X
See page 122 for more information on the thumbnail display.
See page 124 for more information on playback zoom.
thumbnails
Zoom in on
photograph
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to delete
photo.
Delete images
O
Changeprotect
status
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected image,
L (A)
press
L
(A) button (0125).
I
Return to
shooting mode
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
K
Display menus
G
See page 145 for more information.
Create retouched copy of current photograph (0174). If
current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (052).
Retouch photo
or play movie
J
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.
Press 1or 3to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that
shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding
option is selected for Display mode (0146). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS
device was used when the photo was taken.
1/ 12
NIKON D5000
1/ 12
.
:
:
:
O
I SE RE
D
U
C
H
I
IS
O
,
NORM
NAC
T
D
AUTO
.
LATITUDE
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
.
–
.
L I GHT
º
35 36. 371'
RET
O
U
C
H
LONGITUDE
E
º
139 43. 696'
35m
ALTITUDE
TIME(UTC)
15/04/2009
:
.
CO
MM
E
N
T
SPRI
G
H
A
S
CO
M
E
SP
GN
H
A
S
CO
M
E
3636
1
/
250 F11
200
35mm
:
:
01 15 29
.
RI
N
AUTO 0,
0
_
100D5000
DS
C
0001. JPG
NOR AL
4288x2M848
_
100D5000
D
S
C
0001. JPG
AL
15 04 2009 10 02 27
/
/
428N8Ox2RM848
N
I
KON
D5000
:
:
1/12
N
I
KON
D5000
:
:
15 04
/
/
2009 10 02 27
1/12
File information
Overview data
GPS data
Shooting data 3
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
TR SP
D
AP
1
250 F11
MXP.
M
ODE, I S
O
200
:
:
HITE
B
A
LANCE
SPAC
TURE
A
UTO, 0,
0
WCO
L
OR
E
s
RGB
E
0. 0
PI
C
C
TRL : ST
A
N
DARD
F
OCAL LE
N
G
T
H
35mm
QUICK ADJUST : 0
–
–
LE
S
18 55
3.
5
5.
.
6
FN VM
R
CO TRANNST
ACT. D-LIGHT.
ACT. D-LIGHT.
S
H
A
RPE ING
:
:
:
3
–
On
A
A
V
R
BRNI
G
H
T
ESNS
+
1
FL
A
S
H
O
D
E,
–
,
,
Built i n TTL
3
S
A
TUR
A
TI
O
:0
:0
H
UE
High l i ghts
KO D5000
N
I
N
N
I
KO
N
D5000
N
I
KO
N
D5000
1/12
1/12
1/12
N I KON D5000
1
/
12
RGB histogram
Highlights
Shooting data 1
Shooting data 2
I
❚❚File Information
1
2
3
1 Protect status............................................... 125
2 Retouch indicator....................................... 175
3 Frame number/total number of images
4 File name..........................................................63
5 Image quality..................................................62
6 Image size........................................................64
7 Time of recording..........................................20
8 Date of recording ..........................................20
9 Folder name................................................. 152
1/12
4
5
_
100D5000
D
S
C
0001. JPG
AL
15
/
04
/
2009 10 02 27
428N8Ox2RM848
9
:
:
8
7
6
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚RGB Histogram *
1 Protect status ...............................................125
2 Retouch indicator .......................................175
3 White balance ................................................ 96
White balance fine-tuning ..................... 98
4 Camera name
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel
brightness, vertical axis number of
pixels.
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green channel)
4
N I KON D5000
1
/
12
8 Histogram (blue channel)
9 Frame number/total number of images
* Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (0146).
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is
displayed, press X. Use the X and W buttons to zoom in
and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the
portion of the image visible in the monitor.
N I KON D5000
1
/
12
I
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:
If the image contains objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively
even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to
the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to
see photographs in the monitor.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Highlights *
1
2
1 Protect status............................................... 125
2 Retouch indicator....................................... 175
3 Image highlights
3
4 Camera name
5 Frame number/total number of images
Highlights
N
I
KO
N
D5000
1/12
4
5
* Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (0146). Blinking areas indicate
highlights.
❚❚Shooting Data Page 1 1
1
2
3 Metering...........................................................88
Shutter speed ..........................................82, 84
Aperture ....................................................83, 84
4 Shooting mode................................28, 33, 80
ISO sensitivity 2...............................................74
5 Exposure compensation.............................90
6 Focal length.................................................. 197
7 Lens data
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
TR SP
D
AP
1 250
200
F11
–
MXP.
M
O
D
E
, I S
O
H
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
0 . 0
F
OCAL LE
N
GT
35mm
–
LE
S
FN VM
R
18 55
3. 5 5. 6
–
On
A
A
V
R
+ .
FL
A
S
H
O
D
E,
–
,
,
Built i n TTL 1 0
I
N
I
KO
N
D5000
1/12
11
8 Focus mode..............................................54, 60
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3.................19
9 Flash mode......................................................71
Flash compensation.....................................92
10 Camera name
10
1 Protect status................................................125
2 Retouch indicator .......................................175
11 Frame number/total number of images
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0146).
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Shooting Data Page 2 1
1
2
4 Color space....................................................150
5 Picture Control.............................................106
6 Quick adjust 2 ...............................................109
Original Picture Control 3 .........................112
7 Sharpening....................................................109
8 Contrast..........................................................109
9 Brightness......................................................109
10 Saturation 4....................................................109
Filter effects 5 ................................................109
11 Hue 4 ................................................................109
Toning 5...........................................................109
12 Camera name
:
:
3
4
HITE B
A
LANCE
A
UTO, 0,
0
WCO
L
O
R SPAC
E
s
RGB
5
PI
C
TURE
C
TRL
: ST
: 0
A
NDARD
QUICK ADJUST
6
SH
A
RPE ING
:
:
3
0
CO TRANNST
7
BRNIG
HT
ESNS :0
8
9
S
A
TUR
A
TI
O
:0
:0
10
11
H
UE
N
I
KO
N
D5000
1/12
12
13
1 Protect status ...............................................125
2 Retouch indicator.......................................175
3 White balance................................................ 96
Color temperature..................................... 97
White balance fine-tuning ..................... 98
Preset manual............................................. 99
13 Frame number/total number of images
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0146).
2 Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
3 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
4 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
5 Monochrome Picture Controls only.
I
❚❚Shooting Data Page 3 *
1
2
1 Protect status ...............................................125
2 Retouch indicator .......................................175
3 High ISO NR ..................................................151
Long exposure NR ......................................151
4 Active D-Lighting.......................................... 94
5 Retouch history ...........................................174
6 Image comment..........................................169
7 Camera name
.
:
:
:
3
4
5
O
I SE RE
D
U
C
H
N I ISO
,
NORM
NAC
T
D
L I GH
T
O
–R
A
L
.
–
.
D
LMMIG
H
TI
G
RET
O
U
C
H
ARN FILTNER
C
WYAM
OTYPE
TRI
:
.
CO
MM
E
N
T
RI
N
GN
H
A
S
CO
M
E 3636
SPRI
G
H
A
S
CO
M
E
SP
6
.
N
I
KO
N
D5000
1/12
8 Frame number/total number of images
7
8
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0146).
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚GPS Data *
1
2
1 Protect status............................................... 125
2 Retouch indicator....................................... 175
3 Latitude
4 Longitude
5 Altitude
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LATITUDE
N
3
4
º
35 36. 371'
E
LONGITUDE
º
139 43. 696'
35m
ALTITUDE
5
6
15/04/2009
TIME(UTC)
6 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
7 Camera name
:
:
01 15 29
8 Frame number/total number of images
N
I
KO
N
D5000
1/12
7
8
* Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (0114).
❚❚Overview Data
1
2
3
5 Histogram showing the distribution of
tones in the image (0118).
NIKON D5000
1/ 12
4
5
6 ISO sensitivity * ...............................................74
7 Focal length.................................................. 197
8 GPS data indicator ..................................... 114
9 Image comment indicator...................... 169
10 Flash mode......................................................71
11 Flash compensation.....................................92
12 Exposure compensation.............................90
13 Metering...........................................................88
14 Shooting mode................................28, 33, 80
15 Shutter speed ..........................................82, 84
16 Aperture ....................................................83, 84
16
15
14
13
12
6
7
8
.
1 250 F5 6
200
35mm
+
.
–
1. 3
1 0
REAR
AUTO A6,
100D5000
M
1
L
11
9
10
_
D
S
C
0001. PG
:
15/04/2009 10 02 27
N
OR AL
4288x2M848
:
I
1 Frame number/total number of images
2 Protect status................................................125
3 Camera name
4 Retouch indicator .......................................175
* Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
19 File name..........................................................63
20 Image quality..................................................62
21 Image size........................................................64
22 Time of recording..........................................20
23 Date of recording ..........................................20
24 Folder name................................................. 152
25 White balance.................................................96
Color temperature .....................................97
White balance fine-tuning......................98
Preset manual..............................................99
26 Color space................................................... 150
1/ 12
NIKON D5000
17
18
.
1 250 F5 6
200
35mm
26
+
.
–
1. 3
1 0
REAR
25
24
AUTO A6,
M
1
19
_
100D5000
D
S
C
0001. JPG
AL
2009 10 02 27
428N8Ox2RM848
:
:
15
23
/
04
/
22
21 20
17 Picture Control.............................................106
18 Active D-Lighting .........................................94
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W button.
Full-frame
playback
Calendar
playback
Thumbnail playback
To
Use
Description
Display more
images
W
Press W button to increase the number of images displayed.
Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.
When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted
image full frame.
Display fewer
images
X
Use multi selector or command dial to highlight images for
full-frame playback, playback zoom (0124), deletion
(0126), or protection (0125).
Highlight images
Viewhighlighted
image
Delete
highlighted
photo
J
O
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.
See page 126 for more information.
I
Change protect
status of
highlighted
photo
L (A)
See page 125 for more information.
Return to
shooting mode
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
See page 145 for more information.
K
Display menus
G
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W button when 72 images are
displayed.
Full-frame
playback
Calendar
playback
Thumbnail playback
Press the W button to toggle between the date list
and the list of thumbnails for the selected date. Use
the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list or
to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list.
Thumbnail list
Date list
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or
the thumbnail list:
I
To
Use
Description
Toggle between date
list and thumbnail list
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom in on
highlighted photo
Toggle full frame
playback
Press W button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail
list. Press again to return to date list.
W
•
•
Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to zoom in on
highlighted picture.
X
•
•
Date list: View first picture taken on selected date.
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.
J
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
•
•
Date list: Highlight date.
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Delete highlighted
photo(s)
•
•
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.
Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (0126).
O
Change protect
status of highlighted
photo
L (A)
See page 125 for more information.
Return to shooting
mode
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken
immediately.
/
K
Display menus
G
See page 145 for more information.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:
To
Use
Description
Press X to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 27 × (large images),
20 × (medium images) or 13 × (small
Zoom in or out
X / W
images). Press W to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in, use multi selector
to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other
areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom
ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is indicated by
yellow border.
View other
areas of image
Faces (up to 10) detected during zoom
are indicated by white borders in
navigation window. Press P and
rotate command dial to scroll display
to faces without changing zoom ratio.
P+
Select faces
View other
images
Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at
current zoom ratio.
I
Cancel zoom
Changeprotect
status
J
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.
See page 125 for more information.
L (A)
Return to
shooting mode
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
See page 145 for more information.
K
Display menus
G
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L button can be used to
protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted
using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected
images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (023).
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.
Full-frame playback
Thumbnail playback
Calendar playback
2 Press the L (A) button.
The photograph will be marked with a P
icon. To remove protection from the
photograph so that it can be deleted, display
the photograph or highlight it in the
thumbnail list and then press the L (A)
button.
I
L (A) button
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the
Playback folder menu, press the L (A) and O buttons together for about two seconds.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete multiple selected
photographs, all photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the
current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted,
photographs can not be recovered.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1 Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
2 Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Full-frame playback
Thumbnail playback
I
3 Press the O button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O
button again. To exit without deleting the
photograph, press the K button.
A Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by
highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O button (0123).
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q Selected
Delete selected pictures.
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (0146).
❚❚Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1 Select Delete.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Delete in the playback menu and
press 2.
G button
2 Choose Selected.
Highlight Selected and press 2.
I
3 Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button).
4 Select the highlighted picture.
Press the W button to select the
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are
marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to
select additional pictures; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press W.
W button
5 Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1 Choose Select Date.
In the delete menu, highlight Select date
and press 2.
2 Highlight a date.
Press 1or 3to highlight a date.
To view the pictures taken on the
highlighted date, press W. Use the multi
selector to scroll through the pictures, or
press X to view the current picture full
screen. Press W to return to the date list.
W button
3 Select the highlighted date.
Press 2to select all pictures taken on the
highlighted date. Selected dates are marked
with a M icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select
additional dates; to deselect a date,
highlight it and press 2.
I
4 Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a slide show of the
pictures in the current playback folder (0146).
To display the slide show menu, press the G
button and select Slide show in the playback
menu.
G button
The slide show menu contains the following
options:
Option
Description
Start Start slide show.
Frame Choose how long each picture will be
interval displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start in the slide show menu and press J. The
following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
To
Use
Description
I
Skip back/skip ahead
Press 4to return to previous frame, 2to skip to next frame.
View additional photo
info
Change photo info displayed (0117).
Pause/resume slide
show
J
Pause show. Press again to resume.
Exit to playback menu
Exit to playback mode
G
K
See page 146 for more information.
End show and return to playback mode.
Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting
mode.
Exit to shooting mode
A dialog shown at right is displayed when the
show ends. Select Restart to restart or Exit to
return to the playback menu.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Q
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer, how to print
pictures, and how to view them on a television set.
Viewing Photographs on TV........................................................................................ 132
Standard Definition Devices ................................................................................................... 132
High-Definition Devices ........................................................................................................... 133
Connecting to a Computer .......................................................................................... 134
Before Connecting the Camera ............................................................................................. 134
Connecting the Camera............................................................................................................ 135
Printing Photographs ................................................................................................... 136
Connecting the Printer ............................................................................................................. 136
Printing Pictures One at a Time.............................................................................................. 137
Printing Multiple Pictures ........................................................................................................ 139
Creating Index Prints ................................................................................................................. 142
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set ................................................................................ 143
Q
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Photographs on TV
The supplied EG-CP14 audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to
a television or VCR for playback or recording. A type C mini-pin High-Definition
Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party suppliers)
can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
Standard Definition Devices
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm that the camera
video standard (0168) matches that used in the TV.
1 Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.
2 Connect the supplied A/V cable as shown.
Connect to
video device
Audio (white)
Video (yellow)
Connect to
camera
Q
3 Tune the television to the video channel.
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on
the television screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.
A PAL
Resolution drops when images are output on a PAL device.
A Television Playback
Use of an EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector (available separately) is
recommended for extended playback. When the camera is powered by an AC adapter, the
monitor off delay is fixed at one hour.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-pin HDMI cable
(available separately from third-party suppliers).
1 Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to
camera
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or
monitor screen; the camera monitor will remain off.
Q
A HDMI (0168)
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI
format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI
option in the setup menu (0168).
D Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the
connectors can interfere with data transfer.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E6 USB cable to connect the
camera to a computer.
Before Connecting the Camera
Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied Software Suite CD
(see the Quick Start Guide for more information). To ensure that data transfer is not
interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL9a battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge
the battery before use or use an EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector
(available separately).
❚❚Supported Operating Systems
The camera can be connected to computers running the following operating
systems:
•
Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home Premium/
Business/Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/
Professional).
•
Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5.6)
See the websites listed on page xvi for the latest information on supported operating
systems.
❚❚Supplied Software
Nikon Transfer is used to copy photographs from the camera to the computer, where
they can be viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up
photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred, while
ViewNX can be used to sort photographs, convert images to different file formats,
and perform simple editing on NEF/RAW photographs).
Q
A Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
A Camera Control Pro 2
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; 0202) can be used to control the camera from a
computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is running, a capture mode indicator will be
displayed in the viewfinder and information display.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the Camera
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Turn the computer on.
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
3 Connect the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub
or keyboard.
Q
4 Turn the camera on.
5 Transfer photographs.
Nikon Transfer will start automatically; click
the Start Transfer button to transfer
photographs (for more information on using
Nikon Transfer, select Nikon Transfer help
from the Nikon Transfer Help menu).
Start Transfer button
6 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends.
Nikon Transfer will close automatically when transfer is complete.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Photographs
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection,
follow the steps below.
Take photographs
Select photographs for printing using Print set (DPOF)
(0143)
Connect camera to printer (see below).
Print photographs one at a
Print multiple photographs
Create index prints
time (0137)
(0139)
(0142)
Disconnect USB cable
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the EN-EL9a battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection in P, S,
A, and M modes, set Color space to sRGB (0150).
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.
Q
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge
playback display.
q
w
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1 Select a picture.
Press 4or 2to view additional pictures, or press
1or 3to view photo information (0117). Press
the X button to zoom in on the current frame
(0124; press K to exit zoom). To view six
pictures at a time, press the W button. Use the
multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X to
display the highlighted picture full frame.
2 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
Q
3 Adjust printing options.
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.
Option
Description
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (options not
supported by current printer are not listed). Press 1or
Page size 3to choose page size (to print at default page size for
current printer, select Printer default), then press J to
select and return to previous menu.
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to
choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J
to select and return to previous menu.
No. of
copies
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
This option is available only if supported by current
printer. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1
or 3to choose print style from Printer default (print
Border using current printer settings), Print with border (print
photo with white border), or No border, then press J
to select and return to previous menu. Only options
supported by current printer will be displayed.
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to
choose Printer default (print using current printer
settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of
recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J to
Time
stamp
select and return to previous menu.
This option is available only with printers that support
cropping. Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit
without cropping picture, highlight No cropping and
press J. To crop picture, highlight Crop and press 2.
Cropping
If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be
displayed. Press X to increase size of crop, W to
decrease. Choose position of crop using multi selector
and press J. Note that print quality may drop if small
crops are printed at large sizes.
Q
4 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing. To cancel before all copies have been
printed, press J.
D Date Imprint
If you select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu when printing photographs
containing date information recorded using Custom Setting d6 (Date imprint, 0160), the
date will appear twice. The imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs
are cropped or printed without a border.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Multiple Pictures
1 Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge
playback display (see Step 3 on page 137).
G button
2 Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and
press 2.
•
•
Print select: Select pictures for printing.
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures
taken on a selected date.
•
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the Print set (DPOF)
option in the playback menu (0146). The current print order will be
displayed in Step 3.
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index
print. See page 142 for more information.
Q
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select pictures or choose a date.
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in
Step 2, use the multi selector to scroll through
the pictures on the memory card. To display
the current picture full screen, press and
hold the X button. To select the current
picture for printing, press the W button and
press 1. The picture will be marked with a
Z icon and the number of prints will be set
to 1. Keeping the W button pressed, press
1or 3to specify the number of prints (up to
99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the
desired pictures have been selected.
W + 13: Choose number of copies
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
NEF (RAW) photographs (062) can not be
selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu
(0184).
X button: View photo full screen
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1or 3
to highlight a date and press 2to toggle the
highlighted date on or off. To view the
pictures taken on the selected date, press
W. Use the multi selector to scroll through
the pictures, or press and hold X to view the
current picture full screen.
Q
W button: View
photos for selected
date
X button: View
highlighted photo
full screen
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing
options.
5 Adjust printing options.
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.
Option
Description
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (0137; options not supported by current
Page printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose page size (to print at default page
size size for current printer, select Printer default), then press J to select and return
to previous menu.
Menu of border options will be displayed (0138; options not supported by
current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose print style from Printer
Border default (print at current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with
white border), or No border, then press J to select and return to previous
menu.
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (0138; options not supported by
Time current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose Printer default (print at
stamp current printer settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of recording on
photo), or No time stamp, then press J to select and return to previous menu.
6 Start printing.
Q
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing. To cancel before all copies have
been printed, press J.
A Errors
See page 221 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Index Prints
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index print
in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (0139). Note that if the memory card
contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
1 Select Index print.
Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu
(0139) displays the images on the memory card
as shown at right.
2 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
3 Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 141 (a
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small).
4 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing. To cancel before all copies have
been printed, press J.
Q
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Selecting
Print set (DPOF) from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.
1 Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and press 2.
A Creating a New Print Order
To remove all previously selected pictures from
the print order, highlight Deselect all? and
press J.
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card. To display the
current picture in full screen, press and hold
the X button. To select the current picture
for printing, press the W button and press
1. The picture will be marked with a Z icon
and the number of prints will be set to 1.
Keeping the W button pressed, press 1or
3to specify the number of prints (up to 99;
to deselect the picture, press 3when the
Q
W + 13: Choose number of copies
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the
desired pictures have been selected.
X button: View photo full screen
3 Display imprint options.
Press J to display data imprint options.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and press 2
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to
complete the print order without including
this information, proceed to Step 5).
•
Data imprint: Print shutter speed and
aperture on all pictures in print order.
•
Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.
5 Complete the print order.
Highlight Done and press J to complete
the print order.
D Print Set (DPOF)
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to
modify and print the current order (0139). DPOF date and data imprint options are not
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.
The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory
card to store the print order.
Q
NEF (RAW) photographs (062) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu
(0184).
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device
after the print order is created.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Guide
M
The current menu is displayed by pressing the G button; to select from the menus
listed below, press 4. This chapter describes the options available in the menus
below.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...................................................................... 146
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...................................................................... 148
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ........................................................... 153
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup ................................................................................... 165
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .......................................................... 174
m Recent Settings/O My Menu................................................................................... 190
o
i
L
g
u
w
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.
G button
The playback menu contains the following options:
Option
Default
—
Current
—
0
Option
Default
Off
—
0
Delete
127 Rotate tall
146 Slide show
146 Print set (DPOF)
147
147
129
143
Playback folder
Display mode
Image review
—
On
G button ➜ D playback menu
Playback Folder
Choose a folder for playback:
Option
Description
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Active folder in the shooting menu
are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically when a photo
Current is taken. If a memory card is inserted and this option selected before photos have
been taken, a message stating that the folder contains no images will be displayed
during playback. Select All to begin playback.
o
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Display Mode
Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display (0117). Press 1or 3to highlight an
option, then press 2to select the option for the photo
information display. A M appears next to selected items; to
deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback
menu, highlight Done and press J.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Image Review
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Rotate Tall
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for display during
playback. Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate
orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image
review (0147).
Option
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the
camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0170)
will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
On
Off
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
o
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.
G button
The shooting menu contains the following options:
Option
Scene mode
Set Picture
Control
Manage Picture
Control
Image quality
Image size
White balance
ISO sensitivity
settings
Default
0
Option
Default
0
Night landscape 33 Auto distortion
Off
150
control
Standard
—
106
111
Color space
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
Active folder
sRGB
Off
Normal
150
151
151
152
JPEG normal
Large
62
64
96
—
640 × 424 (3 : 2);
sound on
Movie settings
51
76
Auto
Interval timer
shooting
Varies; see page 78 74
Auto 94
—
Active D-Lighting
i
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
ISO Sensitivity Settings
Adjust ISO sensitivity (074).
❚❚ISO Sensitivity Auto Control
If Off is chosen for ISO sensitivity auto control in P, S, A, and M
modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by
the user (074). When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected by the user (flash level is adjusted
appropriately). The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can
be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto
control menu (choose lower values to prevent noise; the minimum value for auto ISO
sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200). In modes P and A, sensitivity will only be
adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum
shutter speed. Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can
not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity. If the
ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than the value selected for Maximum
sensitivity, the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used instead.
When On is selected, the viewfinder shows ISO-AUTO and the
information display ISO-A. These indictors blink when sensitivity
is altered from the value selected by the user.
i
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting
menu to reduce noise (0151). Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when
auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available with
the built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 flash units), possibly preventing the
camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Auto Distortion Control
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when
shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area
visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final
photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs
before recording begins may increase). This option is available
only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded).
A Retouch: Distortion Control
For information creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin-
cushion distortion, see page 185.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction. Choose sRGB for photographs that will be
printed or used “as is,” with no further modification. Adobe RGB
has a wider color gamut and is recommended for images that
will be extensively processed or retouched after leaving the
camera.
A Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that
represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe
RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is
recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs
that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or
kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be
printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
i
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant; applications and
printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically. If the application
or device does not support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. For more
information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.
A Nikon Software
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Long Exp. NR
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower
than 8 s will be processed to reduce noise. The time required for
processing is roughly equal to the current shutter speed; during
processing, “l m” will blink in the viewfinder and
photographs can not be taken. In continuous release mode,
frame rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will
drop. Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is
turned off before processing is complete.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”
Option
Description
S High
T Normal
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 800 and higher. While
photographs are being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will
drop. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
U Low
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3 and higher. The
amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is
selected for High ISO NR.
Off
i
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Active Folder
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent
photographs will be stored.
•
Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.
Current folder
D5000 (default folder)
Other folders (in alphabetical
order)
•
•
•
New: Create a new folder and name it as described below.
Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described below.
Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.
❚❚Naming and Renaming Folders
Folder names can be up to five characters long. To
move the cursor in the name area, rotate the
command dial. To enter a new letter at the current
cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the
desired character in the keyboard area and press the
Keyboard
area
Name area
X button. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
Press J to save changes and return to the shooting menu, or press G to exit
without creating a new folder or changing the folder name.
D Folder Names
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned
automatically by the camera (e.g., 100D5000). Each folder can contain up to 999
photographs. During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the
selected name. If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a
photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding one to the
current folder number (e.g., 101D5000). The camera treats folders with the same name but
different folder numbers as the same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for
Active folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON,
etc.) will be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder (0146). Renaming
changes all folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact.
i
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A (Custom Settings
menu) tab.
G button
Custom Setting groups
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings
to suit individual preferences.
Main menu
L
A:Reset custom
settings (0154)
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
Default
0
154
A
a
a1 AF-area mode
Varies with shooting mode; see page 78
155
155
155
156
a2 Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a3 Live view autofocus
a4 Rangefinder
On
Varies with shooting mode; see page 78
Off
b
Exposure
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl.
Timers/AE lock
1/3 step
156
c
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
c2 Auto off timers
c3 Self-timer
Off
Normal
10 s; number of shots: 1
1 min.
156
157
157
157
c4 Remote on duration
d
Shooting/display
d1 Beep
d2 Viewfinder grid display
d3 ISO display
d4 File number sequence
d5 Exposure delay mode
d6 Date imprint
High
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
—
158
158
158
159
159
160
161
d7 Live view display options
e
Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash
e2 Auto bracketing set
TTL
AE bracketing
162
162
f
Controls
f1 Assign E/Fn button
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f3 Reverse dial rotation
f4 No memory card?
Self-timer
AE/AF lock
No
163
164
164
164
164
Release locked
f5 Reverse indicators
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
A: Reset Custom Settings
L
Choose Yes to reset Custom Settings to default values. Custom
Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a: Autofocus
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a1: AF-area Mode
This option determines how the focus point for autofocus is
selected (056).
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a2: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
If On is selected and lighting is poor, the built-in AF-assist
illuminator (055) will light to assist the focus operation in
single-servo AF (AF-S selected for focus mode, or single-servo AF
selected in AF-A focus mode) when Auto-area is selected for AF-
area mode or when Single point, Dynamic area, or 3D-
tracking (11 points) is selected and the center focus point is
used. If Off is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will not light to
assist the focus operation. The camera may not be able to focus
using autofocus when lighting is poor.
AF-assist illuminator
A See Also
See page 197 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist. See page 212 for
the shooting modes in which the AF-assist illuminator can be used.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a3: Live View Autofocus
This option determines how the focus point for autofocus is
selected in live view (043).
L
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a4: Rangefinder
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether the camera is
correctly focused in manual focus mode (054; note that this function is not available
in shooting mode M, when the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject
is correctly exposed).
Indicator
Description
Indicator
Description
Focus point is slightly
behind subject.
Camera in focus.
Focus point is slightly in
front of subject.
Focus point is well
behind subject.
Camera can not
determine correct
focus.
Focus point is well in
front of subject.
A Using the Rangefinder
The rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster and is not
available in live view. The desired results may not be achieved in situations in which the
camera would be unable to focus using autofocus (055).
b: Exposure
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.
This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, exposure compensation, flash compensation, and
bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV (1/3 step)
or 1/2 EV (1/2 step).
L
c: Timers/AE Lock
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
At the default setting of Off, exposure only locks when the AE-L/
AF-L button is pressed. If On is selected, exposure will also lock
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c2: Auto off Timers
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no operations are
performed during menu display and playback (Playback/menus), while
photographs are displayed in the monitor after shooting (Image review), and how
long the exposure meters, viewfinder, and information display remain on when no
operations are performed (Auto meter-off). Choose shorter auto-off delays to
reduce the drain on the battery.
Option
Description (all times are approximate)
Auto-off timers are set to the following values:
Playback/menus
Image review
Auto meter-off
C Short
D Normal
E Long
Short
Normal
Long
8 s
12 s
20 s
4 s
4 s
20 s
4 s
8 s
1 min.
Make separate adjustments to the Playback/menus, Image review, and Auto
meter-off timers. When settings are complete, highlight Done and press J.
F Custom
A Auto off Timers
The exposure meters will not turn off automatically when the camera is powered by an
optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector. The monitor and viewfinder will not
turn off automatically when the camera is connected to a printer via USB.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c3: Self-Timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number of shots taken each
time the shutter-release button is pressed in self-timer mode.
Option
Description
Self-timer delay Choose a shutter release delay.
Press 1or 3to choose the number of shots taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed in
self-timer mode (if a value other than 1 is selected,
shots will be taken at 3 s intervals).
L
Number of shots
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c4: Remote on Duration
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the
remote before cancelling delayed or quick-response remote
mode and restoring single-frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-
release mode (065). Choose shorter times for longer battery
life.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d: Shooting/Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d1: Beep
If High (high pitch) or Low (low pitch) is selected, a beep will
sound at the selected pitch when the camera focuses in single-
servo AF (AF-S or when shooting stationary subjects in AF-A
focus mode), while the release timer is counting down in self-
timer and delayed remote modes (065, 67), or when a
photograph is taken in quick-response remote mode (067).
The beep will not sound when Off is selected; note that in
v (quiet shutter-release mode), Beep is not available and a
beep does not sound when the camera focuses.
The current setting is shown in the information display: 3 is
displayed when the beep is on, 2 when it is off.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for
reference when composing photographs.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d3: ISO Display
Choose On to show the current ISO sensitivity setting in the
L
frame count displays in the viewfinder.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d4: File Number Sequence
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file
number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or
from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered
9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin
again from 0001.
On
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new
folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder
contains 999 photographs.
Off
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number
K Reset by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is
empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
D File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 and then either format the current memory
card or insert a new memory card.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d5: Exposure Delay Mode
At the default setting of Off, shutter is released when the shutter-release button is
pressed. In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, On
can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release
button is pressed and the mirror is raised.
L
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d6: Date Imprint
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they are taken.
Option
Off
Description
The time and date do not appear on photographs.
15.04.2009
a Date
The date or date and time are imprinted on
photographs taken while this option is in effect.
1155..0044..22000099 1100::02
b Date and time
c Date counter
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp showing the number of
days between the date of shooting and a selected date (0161).
At settings other than Off, the selected option is indicated by a d icon in the
information display.
A Date Imprint
The date is recorded in the order selected in the Time zone and date menu (0169). Date
information is not imprinted on photographs taken in NEF (RAW) format and can not be
added to or removed from existing pictures. To print the date of recording on photographs
taken with date imprint off, select Time stamp in the PictBridge menu (0138, 141), or
select Imprint date in the Print set (DPOF) menu to print the date of recording on all
pictures in the current DPOF print order (0144).
L
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Date Counter
Pictures taken while this option is in effect are imprinted with
the number of days remaining until a future date or the number
days elapsed since a past date. Use it to track the growth of a
child or count down the days until a birthday or wedding.
02 / 20.04.2009
02 / 24.04.2009
Future date (two days remaining)
Past date (two days elapsed)
Up to three separate dates can be stored in slots 1, 2, and 3. The
first time you use the date counter, you will be prompted to
select a date for slot 1; enter a date using the multi selector and
press J. To change the date or store additional dates, highlight
a slot, press 2, and enter the date. To use the stored date,
highlight the slot and press J.
To choose a date counter format, highlight Display options and
press 2to display the menu shown at right. Highlight an option
and press J. Highlight Done in the date counter menu and
press J when settings are complete.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d7: Live View Display Options
Choose the indicators available for display in live view mode
(045). Press 1or 3to highlight an option, then press 2to
select. A M appears next to selected items; to deselect,
highlight and press 2. To return to the Custom Settings menu,
highlight Done and press J (note that at least one option must
be on).
L
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e: Bracketing/Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M modes.
Option
Description
1 TTL
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/32 (1/32 of full power). At full power,
the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 18/59 (m/ft., ISO 200, 20 °C/68 °F).
2
Manual
A Manual
A Y icon blinks in the viewfinder and information display when
Manual is selected and the flash is raised.
A The SB-400
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on,
Custom Setting e1 changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash
control mode for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and Manual.
A Flash Control
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination
with the built-in flash or optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400 flash units (070, 198).
•
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance between
the main subject and the background.
L
•
Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the
brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which
the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when exposure
compensation is used.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional
flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e2: Auto Bracketing Set
Choose the setting (exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance) varied when
bracketing is in effect (P, S, A, and M modes only; see page 103).
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f: Controls
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f1: Assign E/Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn (E) button.
Fn (E) button
Option
Description
E
Self-timer
Press the Fn (E) button to toggle self-timer mode on and off (069).
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select the
release mode (065).
I
Release mode *
Image quality/ Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select image
v
w
m
size *
quality and size (062).
ISO
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select ISO
sensitivity (074).
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select white
balance (P, S, A, and M modes only; 096).
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select an Active
D-Lighting option (P, S, A, and M modes only; 094).
sensitivity *
White
balance *
Active
!
D-Lighting *
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, “RAW”
will appear in the information display and an NEF (RAW) copy will be
recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn (E) button is pressed.
The exposure-count displays show the number of NEF (RAW) images
that can be recorded. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy,
press the Fn (E) button again or turn the camera off.
& +NEF (RAW)
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select a
bracketing increment (exposure and white balance bracketing) or to
turn ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0104).
Auto
t
bracketing *
L
* The item currently selected for Custom Setting f1 is shown by a white-on-black icon
(Release mode is shown by an Fn icon).
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button.
AE-L/AF-L button
.
Option
Description
B
C
F
AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
AF lock only Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and remains locked
E AE lock (hold) until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn
off.
The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can
not be used to focus.
A AF-ON
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation
Choose Yes to reverse the direction of the command dial.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f4: No Memory Card?
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a
memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release allows the shutter
to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). Note that
when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately), photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and
the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option.
L
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f5: Reverse Indicators
At the default setting of
(V), the exposure
indicators in the viewfinder and information display are
displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on
the right. Select
(W) to display negative values
on the left and positive values on the right.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.
G button
The setup menu contains the following options:
Option
Format memory
card
Default
0
Option
HDMI
Time zone and
Default
Auto
0
168
—
23
—
169
LCD brightness
0; Auto dim: on 166 date
Graphic;
Background color 166
black
Language
—
—
169
169
Info display
format
Image comment
Auto image
rotation
Image dust off ref
photo
On
—
170
171
114
Auto information
display
Info wrap-around
Clean image
sensor
On
Off
—
168
168
206
Auto meter off:
enable
GPS
Eye-Fi upload 2
Firmware version
Enable
—
173
173
Lock mirror up for
—
—
208
168
cleaning 1
Video mode
1
2
Not available when battery is low.
Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0173).
g
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness menu contains the following options:
•
LCD brightness: The menu at right will be displayed; press 1or
3to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher values for
increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
Auto dim: If On is selected, the monitor will gradually dim while
shooting information is displayed.
•
G button ➜ B setup menu
Info Display Format
Choose from the following two formats for the information display (08). Separate
formats can be selected for auto and scene modes on the one hand and for P, S, A, and
M modes on the other.
Classic (0167)
Graphic (08)
1 Choose the modes in which the selected
information display will be used.
Highlight Auto/scene modes or P, S, A, and M
modes and press 2.
2 Select Classic or Graphic.
Highlight Classic or Graphic and press 2.
g
3 Select a background color.
Highlight a background color and press J.
Choose from blue, black, or orange (Classic) or
green, black, or brown (Graphic).
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The “Classic” display is shown below.
Camera rotated 90° to shoot
in tall (portrait) orientation
Camera in normal orientation
1
Programmed auto
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
1
Programmed auto
29
28 27 26
5
6
4
3
17
18
25
8
7
16
15
14
13
8
7
19 20 2122 23 24
Set
2
P
3
4
5
6
Set
P
2
1110 9 12
1 Shooting mode
12 Release mode.........................65 22 “Beep” indicator ..................158
i auto/
13 ISO sensitivity ........................ 74 23 Number of exposures
j auto (flash off) .............. 28
Scene modes ...................... 33
P, S, A, and M modes........... 80
remaining ........................... 29
Capture mode indicator ....134
24 GPS connection
indicator.............................114
25 Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator.............................149
26 Date imprint indicator .......160
27 Aperture (f-number) ......83, 84
28 Exposure indicator................ 85
Exposure compensation
14 White balance ........................96
15 Image size ...............................64
16 Image quality .........................62
17 Bracketing indicator ...........103
18 Manual flash indicator........162
Flash compensation indicator
for optional flash units....200
19 Auto-area AF indicator.........57
3D-tracking indicator ...........57
Focus point..............................58
2 Help icon............................... 221
3 Flash mode ............................. 71
4 Exposure compensation...... 90
5 Flash compensation ............. 92
6 Picture Control..................... 106
7 Bracketing increment ........ 104
8 Active D-Lighting.................. 94
indicator............................... 91
Bracketing progress indicator
..............................................105
29 Shutter speed...................82, 84
9 Metering.................................. 88 20 Eye-Fi connection
indicator .............................173
10 AF-area mode ........................ 56
21 Battery indicator....................28
11 Focus mode............................ 54
g
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Auto Information Display
This option can be set separately for auto and scene modes and for P, S, A, and M
modes. If On is selected, the information display will appear after the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway; if image review (0147) is off, it will also be displayed
immediately after shooting. Choose On if you find yourself frequently referring to
the information display during shooting. If Off is selected, the information display
can only be viewed by pressing the R button.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Info Wrap-around
If On is selected, the cursor will “wrap around” from one edge of
the information display to the other.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Video Mode
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the A/V out connector, be
sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).
G button ➜ B setup menu
HDMI
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition
Multimedia Interface) connector, allowing pictures to be played
back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a type C
cable (available separately from commercial suppliers). Before
connecting the camera to high-definition device, choose an
HDMI format. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically
select the appropriate format.
g
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Time Zone and Date
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn
daylight saving time on or off.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the
new time zone.
Time zone
Date and time Set the camera clock (020).
Date format Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
Daylight
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be
saving time advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The following options are
available:
Option
Description
Danish
Option
Description
Italian
Option
Description
Swedish
German
English
Spanish
Finnish
French
Dutch
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Russian
Traditional
Chinese
Simplified
Chinese
Japanese
Korean
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0202). The
comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information
display (0120).
•
•
Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 152. Comments can be up to
36 characters long.
g
•
Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all
subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned
on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,
allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback or when viewed in
ViewNX or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0202). The following orientations are
recorded:
Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counterclockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.
D Auto Image Rotation
In continuous release mode (065), the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all
photographs in the same burst, even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.
A Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0147).
g
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Dust off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).
Image dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1 Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J. To exit without acquiring image dust off
data, press G.
•
•
Start: The message shown at right will be
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the
viewfinder.
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to
clean the image sensor before starting. The
message shown at right will be displayed and
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder when
cleaning is complete.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not
be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select
Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with
existing photographs.
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the
shutter-release button halfway.
g
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus
mode, set focus to infinity manually.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust
Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is
pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,
increasing recording times.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark,
the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust
Off reference data and the message shown at
right will be displayed. Choose another
reference object and repeat the process from
step 1.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs
taken with different lenses or at different apertures.
Reference images can not be viewed using computer
imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when
reference images are viewed on the camera.
g
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Eye-Fi Upload
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload
photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if
signal strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where
wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon
in the information display:
• 6: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
• 7: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload.
• 8 (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• 8 (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• !: Disable selected for Eye-Fi upload but camera unable to turn card off; see
“Eye-Fi Cards,” below.
D Eye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a warning is displayed in
the monitor (0222), turn the camera off and remove the card.
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi
functions. Any support inquires should be directed to the manufacturer.
A Supported Eye-Fi Cards
As of March 2009, the following 2 GB Eye-Fi cards can be used: Eye-Fi Card, Eye-Fi Home,
Eye-Fi Share, and Eye-Fi Explore. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
g
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.
G button
The retouch menu is used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs
on the memory card, and is only available when a memory card containing
photographs is inserted in the camera. Movies can not be retouched.
Option
0
Option
0
i
D-Lighting 1
176 & Quick retouch 1
185
185
185
185
186
186
j Red-eye correction 1 176
'
(
)
q
r
2
Straighten
Distortion control
Fisheye
Color outline
Perspective control
Stop-motion movie 2 187
k
l
m
Trim
177
178
178
179
180
182
Monochrome 1
Filter effects 1
n Color balance 1
0
Small picture
Image overlay 2
NEF (RAW)
o
Side-by-side
p
189
comparison 3
%
184
processing
1 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control
or JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images created with Monochrome selected for Set Picture
Control (cross screen filter effects can be applied to monochrome images).
2 Can only be selected by pressing G button and selecting N tab.
3 Available only if J button is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or
original is displayed.
A Retouching Copies
Up to ten effects can in most cases be applied in succession to a single image, although with
the exception of Image overlay each option can only be applied once (note that multiple
edits may result in loss of detail). Options that can not be applied to the current image are
grayed out and unavailable.
u
A Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Small picture, Image overlay, NEF (RAW)
processing, and Stop-motion movie, copies created from JPEG images are the same size
and quality as the original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large
fine-quality JPEG images. Time stamps added with Custom Setting d6 (Date imprint;
0160) may however be cropped out or illegible depending on the retouch options used.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1 Display a photo full frame (0116).
A Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch
images created with other devices.
2 Press J to display the retouch menu.
A Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off automatically if no
operations are performed for the length of time
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers).
The default is 12 s.
3 Display retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu
and press J.
4 Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the
selected item. To return to full-frame playback without creating a retouched
copy, press K.
5 Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched
copies are indicated by a N icon.
A Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu
The photographs to be retouched can also be selected from the retouch menu.
u
Highlight an option and
Highlight a picture and
Create retouched copy of
selected picture.
press 2.
press J.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before
After
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of correction performed.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and
is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction is previewed as
shown at right. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
To
Use
Description
Zoom in
X
Press X button to zoom in, W button to zoom
out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation
window is displayed when zoom buttons or
multi selector is pressed; area currently visible
in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.
Zoom out
W
View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom
Create copy
J
J
u
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy will
be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy will
be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following
table.
To
Use
X
Description
Increase size of crop
Reduce size of crop
Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.
Press the W button to reduce the size of the crop.
W
Change crop aspect
ratio
Rotate the command dial to switch between aspect ratios of
3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.
Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the
image.
Move crop
Create copy
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
D Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG
fine (062); copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.
The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio
3 : 2
4 : 3
5 : 4
1 : 1
16 : 9
Possible sizes
3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424
3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480
3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480
2,560 × 2,560, 1,920 × 1,920, 1,440 × 1,440, 960 × 960, 720 × 720, 480 × 480
3,424 × 1,920, 2,560 × 1,440, 1,920 × 1,080, 1,280 × 720, 960 × 536, 640 × 360
u
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Monochrome
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview
of the selected image; press 1to increase color
saturation, 3to decrease. Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Filter Effects
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as described
below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture less
Skylight blue. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown
at right.
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in the
monitor.
Warm
filter
Red
intensifier
Green
intensifier
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green intensifier),
or blues (Blue intensifier). Press the multi selector up to
increase the effect, down to decrease.
Blue
intensifier
Add starburst effects to light sources.
•
•
Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.
Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light sources
affected.
u
Cross
screen
•
•
•
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
Length of points: Choose the length of points.
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right.
Press X to preview the copy full frame.
Save: Create a retouched copy.
•
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
Add a soft filter effect. Use the multi selector to choose
from 1 (high), 2 (normal), or 3 (low).
Soft
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Balance
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color
balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor
together with red, green, and blue histograms (0118) giving
the distribution of tones in the copy.
Increase amount of green
Create retouched copy
Increase amount of
Increase amount of
blue
amber
Increase amount of magenta
A Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X
button. The histogram will be updated to show data only for the
portion of the image displayed in the monitor. While the image is
zoomed in, press the L (A) button to toggle back and forth
between color balance and zoom. When zoom is selected, you can
zoom in and out with the X and W buttons and scroll the image with
the multi selector.
u
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Small Picture
Create a small copy of the selected picture. The following sizes are available:
Option
Description
0
1
2
640×480 Suited to television playback.
320×240 Suited to display on Web pages.
160×120 Suitable for e-mail.
The small picture option can be used during full-frame playback as described on
page 175. The procedure for selecting pictures after choosing Small picture from
the retouch menu, however, differs from that described at the beginning of this
section: instead of selecting a single photograph and then choosing a picture size,
the user selects a picture size first and then selects one or more photographs to copy
at the selected size as described below.
Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.
Follow the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures.
1 Select Choose size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
2 Choose the desired size.
Highlight desired size and press J to select
and return to the previous menu.
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
u
4 Select pictures.
Highlight pictures using the multi selector
and press the W button to select or
deselect. Selected pictures are marked by an
icon.
W button
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Press J to complete the operation.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J to copy
pictures at the selected size and return to
playback. To exit without creating copies,
highlight No and press J, or press G to
exit to the retouch menu.
A Viewing Small Pictures
Small pictures are indicated by a gray border. Playback zoom is not available when small
pictures are displayed. Note that because small copies do not have the same aspect ratio as
the original, the edges of the copy will be cropped out on its longest dimension.
u
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (062, 64; all options
are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu
and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted.
2 Display NEF (RAW) images.
Press J to display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this
camera.
3 Highlight a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight the first
photograph in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full frame, press and
hold the X button.
4 Select the highlighted photograph.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph
and return to the preview display. The selected
image will appear as Image 1.
5 Select the second photograph.
Press 2to highlight Image 2. Repeat Steps 2–4
to select the second photo.
u
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Set gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1or 3to
set gain for the selected image to values
between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second
image. The default value is 1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts
gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
7 Highlight the Preview column.
Press 4or 2to highlight the Preview column.
8 Preview the overlay.
Press 1or 3to highlight Overlay and press J
(to save the overlay without displaying a
preview, highlight Save and press J). To return
to Step 6 and select new photos or adjust gain,
press W.
9 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save
the overlay. After an overlay is created, the
resulting image will be displayed full-frame in
the monitor.
+
D Image Overlay
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,
aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and
values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1.
u
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch
menu and press 2to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera.
2 Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph
(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,
press and hold the X button). Press J to select
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the
next step.
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.
Choose image quality (062), image size (064), white balance (096),
exposure compensation (090), and a Picture Control (0106) for the JPEG
copy. Color space (0150) and high ISO noise reduction (0151) are set to the
values currently selected in shooting mode. Note that white balance is not
available with pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation increments differ from those used in shooting mode.
Image quality
Image size
White balance
Exposure compensation
Picture Control
4 Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy
of the selected photograph. The resulting image
will be displayed full-frame in the monitor. To
exit without copying the photograph, press the
G button.
u
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Quick Retouch
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect
can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Straighten
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2to
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it counterclockwise
(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square
copy). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to
playback without creating a copy.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
page 150). Press 2to reduce barrel distortion, 4to reduce pin-
cushion distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion
control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
D Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain
other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed with other lenses.
u
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Fisheye
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye
lens. Press 2to increase the effect (this also increases the
amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image),
4to reduce it. Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to
exit to playback without creating a copy.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Outline
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for
painting. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press
J to copy the photograph.
Before
After
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control
result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy
the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating
a copy.
Before
After
u
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Stop-Motion Movie
Selecting Stop-motion movie from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in
Step 1. Follow the steps below to create a stop-motion movie from photographs
taken with the camera.
1 Choose the frame size.
Highlight Frame size and press 2to display a
menu of frame size options. Highlight the
desired frame size and press J.
2 Choose the frame rate.
Highlight Frame rate and press 2to display a
menu of frame rate options. Highlight the
desired frame rate and press J.
3 Select Create movie.
Highlight Create movie and press J.
4 Select the first frame.
Press 4and 2to select a photograph for the first
frame (keep the multi selector pressed to scroll
rapidly through the photographs) and press J
to select.
5 Select the last frame.
Use the multi selector to choose the last frame as
described Step 4. The pictures in the movie are
marked with L; if the first frame is after the last
frame, the frames in between will appear in the
movie in reverse order. The movie can include
up to 100 photographs.
u
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Select Save.
The menu shown at right will be displayed; if no
further edits are necessary, highlight Save and
press J to proceed to Step 7.
To edit the movie, highlight Edit and press J.
The following options will be displayed:
•
•
Starting image: Choose a new starting frame.
Middle image: Remove frames from the middle
of the movie. Press 4and 2to highlight a
photo, 1or 3to remove the L icon. Pictures
from which the L has been removed will be
removed from the movie when you press J.
End image: Choose a new end frame.
•
•
Cancel: Exit without making further changes.
7 Save the movie.
The menu shown at right will be displayed;
highlight Save and press J to save the movie. To
preview the movie, select Preview. The movie
can be paused, rewound, or fast-forwarded
during the preview. To choose a new frame rate,
select Frame rate; to edit the movie as described
in Step 6, select Edit.
D Stop-motion Movies
Stop-motion movies can not include cropped copies, small copies, or images created with
other devices.
A Viewing Stop-motion Movies
Stop-motion movies are marked with a 1 icon in full-frame playback. To view a stop-motion
movie, display it in full-frame playback and press J.
Stop-motion files are named as described on page 63.
u
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Side-by-Side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available
if the J button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is
played back full frame.
❚❚Making a Side-by-Side Comparison
1 Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a N icon) or a
photograph that has been retouched in full-
frame playback and press J.
2 Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison in the
retouch menu and press J.
Options used to create
3 Compare the copy with the original.
copy
The source image is displayed on the left, the
retouched copy on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed at the top of the
display. Press 4or 2to switch between the
source image and the retouched copy. To view
the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold
the X button. If the copy was created from two
images using Image overlay, press 1or 3to
view the other source image. If multiple copies
Source Retouched
image copy
exist for the current source image, press 1or 3to view the other copies. To
exit to playback mode, press the K button, or press J to return to playback
with the highlighted image displayed.
D Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has
since been deleted or that was protected when the copy was made (0125).
u
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
m Recent Settings/OMy Menu
The camera offers a choice of two custom menus: a recent settings menu consisting of
the twenty most recently used settings, added to the top of the menu in the order
they are used, and My Menu, a customized list of options from the playback, shooting,
Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. To display the custom menu, press G
and select the custom menu tab (m or O, depending on whether Recent settings or
My Menu is currently selected for Choose tab).
G button
❚❚Choose Tab: Choosing a Custom Menu
Both the recent settings menu and My Menu contain a Choose tab option for
choosing the menu displayed. To switch back and forth between the recent settings
menu and My Menu, follow the steps below.
1 Select Choose tab.
In the m RECENT SETTINGS menu or O MY
MENU, highlight Choose tab and press 2.
2 Select the desired menu.
Highlight Recent settings or My Menu and
press J. The selected menu will be displayed.
m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings
The recent settings menu lists the twenty most
recently used settings. Press 1or 3to highlight an
option and press 2to select.
w
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20
options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
❚❚Adding Options to My Menu
1 Select Add items.
In My Menu, highlight Add items and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the
option you wish to add and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
Items currently in My Menu are indicated by a
checkmark; items indicated by a V icon can not
be selected.
4 Position the new item.
Press 1or 3to move the new item up or down
in My Menu. Press J to add the new item.
Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.
❚❚Deleting Options from My Menu
1 Select Remove items.
In My Menu, highlight Remove items and press 2.
2 Select items.
Highlight items and press 2to select or deselect.
Selected items are indicated by a check mark.
w
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J.
4 Delete the selected items.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J
to delete the selected items.
A Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.
❚❚Reordering Options in My Menu
1 Select Rank items.
In My Menu, highlight Rank items and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press
J.
3 Position the item.
Press 1or 3to move the item up or down in My
Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
w
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Notes
n
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter
problems using the camera.
Compatible Lenses........................................................................................................ 194
Compatible CPU Lenses............................................................................................................ 194
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................................. 195
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ............................................................................ 198
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)......................................................................... 198
Other Accessories.......................................................................................................... 202
Approved Memory Cards......................................................................................................... 203
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter ............................................................... 204
Caring for the Camera .................................................................................................. 205
Storage............................................................................................................................................ 205
Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 205
The Low-Pass Filter ..................................................................................................................... 206
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .......................................................... 210
Available Settings.......................................................................................................... 212
Memory Card Capacity................................................................................................. 215
Exposure Program......................................................................................................... 216
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 217
Display ............................................................................................................................................ 217
Shooting (All Modes) ................................................................................................................. 218
Shooting (P, S, A, M).................................................................................................................... 219
Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 220
Miscellaneous............................................................................................................................... 220
Error Messages............................................................................................................... 221
Specifications ................................................................................................................. 224
Battery Life..................................................................................................................................... 231
n
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compatible Lenses
Compatible CPU Lenses
Autofocus is available with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses only; autofocus is not supported
with other autofocus (AF) lenses. IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used. The features
available with compatible CPU lenses are listed below:
Camera setting
Focus
Mode
Metering
L
MF (with electronic
rangefinder)
Autoandscene
modes; P, S, A
M
N
Lens/accessory
AF
✔
MF
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
M
✔
✔
3D Color
2
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
2
,
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR1
PC-E NIKKOR series
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D4
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter5
—
—
—
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
,
3
2
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
6
6
2
2
2
✔
✔
✔
7
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
—
—
✔
✔
✔
8
✔
✔
1 Use AF-S or AF-I lenses to get the most from your camera. Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR
lenses.
2 Spot metering meters selected focus point (088).
3 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems may not function as expected when the
lens is shifted and/or tilted or an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.
5 AF-S or AF-I lens required.
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5
lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator may be
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until
image in viewfinder is in focus.
8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
A Identifying AF-S and AF-I Lenses
AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-I lenses names beginning with AF-I.
A Identifying CPU and Type G and D Lenses
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter
on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring
CPU lens
Type G lens
Type D lens
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
n
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another
mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens
aperture ring and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other features
requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU lenses can not be used; see
“Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses,” below.
Camera setting
Focus
Mode
Autoandscene
MF modes; P, S, A
Metering
MF (with electronic
rangefinder)
Lens/accessory
AF
M
✔
L, M, N
—
—
—
—
1
2
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4
Reflex NIKKOR
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
2, 3
2
✔
✔
—
✔
4
2
2
2
PC NIKKOR
AI-type Teleconverter
✔
✔
5
✔
✔
✔
—
—
1
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 6
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
PN-11)
✔
1
2
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
2 Electronic analog exposure display can not be used.
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D5000:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,
1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)
n
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm, although in
some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-
eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent
shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm and can not be used in the macro range
of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following
lenses at ranges less than those given below:
Lens
Zoom position
24 mm
20 mm
24 mm
Under 24 mm
24 mm
28 mm
28 mm
35 mm
24 mm
18 mm
18 mm
18 mm
24 mm
24 mm
28 mm
35 mm
50 mm
24 mm
35 mm
250 mm
350 mm
24 mm
Minimum range
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.
3.0 m/9 ft. 10 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
—
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.
3.0 m/9 ft. 10 in.
AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED
AF 18–35mm f/3.5– 4.5D ED
AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S DX 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
AF-S DX VR 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5 ED *
* When not shifted or tilted.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24 mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the
entire subject at all ranges.
D Dark Edges in the Viewfinder
You may notice darkening of the edges of the image in the viewfinder with some lenses. This
has no effect on photographs.
n
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D AF-Assist Illumination
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR • AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S DX VR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED
A Calculating Picture Angle
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed
by the D5000, in contrast, is 23.6 × 15.8 mm, meaning that the picture angle of a 35mm
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D5000. The approximate focal length of lenses
for the D5000 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens
by about 1.5.
Picture size (35mm format)
(36 × 24 mm)
Picture diagonal
Lens
Picture size (D5000)
(23.6 × 15.8 mm)
Picture angle (35mm format)
Picture angle (D5000)
n
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with
CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units can be attached directly to the
camera accessory shoe as described below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a
safety lock for flash units with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and
SB-400.
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.
2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash unit for details.
The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is
attached.
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication
between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.
n
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:
•
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Feature
Guide
No. 3
SB-900 1
34/111
48/157
SB-800
38/125
53/175
SB-600
30/98
42/138
SB-400
21/69
30/98
SB-R200 2
10/32
14/49
ISO 100
ISO 200
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white balance, the
camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Controlled remotely using optional SB-900, SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight
commander.
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800 and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-900 with standard
illumination.
•
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible
camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-
600, or SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
The following features are available with the above flash units:
Flash unit
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Commander Remote
SB-900
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
SB-900
SB-900
Flash mode/feature
i-TTL i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR 2
AA Auto aperture 2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
6
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
3
5
5
3
4
6
6
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
6
6
A
Non-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
Manual
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
7
M
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
RPT Repeating flash
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
AF-assist for multi-area AF 2
Flash Color Information Communication
REAR Rear-curtain sync
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
Y
Red-eye reduction
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Auto zoom
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0149)
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.
2 CPU lens required.
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit.
4 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.
5 Selected with flash unit.
6 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
7 Can be selected with camera.
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture.
For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35 mm zoom head
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply
the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
n
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.
Speedlight
SB-80DX, SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26, SB-25,
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S,
SB-23, SB-29 3,
Flash mode
SB-24
SB-50DX 1
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3
A
M
Non-TTL auto
Manual
Repeating flash
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
G
✔
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4
✔
1 In P, S, A, and M modes, lower built-in flash and use optional flash unit only.
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto
flash).
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-NIKKOR ED 105mm f/2.8G and AF-S Micro-NIKKOR 60mm
f/2.8G ED lenses only.
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D5000 is not included in the
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, the flash will fire with
every shot even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used (l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y,
z, 1, 2 and 3).
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200. At values over
3200, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the
flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has
fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the
monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.
If the controls on the optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SU-800 flash unit are used to set
flash compensation, Y will appear in the information display.
n
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:
•
SB-900: Active AF-assist illumination is available for all
focus points; with 17–135 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is not available with the focus points shown in
gray.
17–105 mm
24–34 mm
106–135 mm
35–105 mm
•
SB-800, SB-600 and SU-800: With 24–105 mm AF lenses, active
AF-assist illumination is not available with the focus
points shown in gray.
With other flash units, the camera AF-assist illuminator is
used for AF-assist illumination and red-eye reduction.
n
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D5000.
•
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL9a (016–17): Additional EN-EL9a batteries are
available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. The EN-EL9a can
be recharged using an MH-23 quick charger. EN-EL9 batteries can also be used.
Quick Charger MH-23 (016): The MH-23 can be used to recharge EN-EL9a and
EN-EL9 batteries.
Power Connector EP-5, AC Adapter EH-5a: These accessories can be used to power the
camera for extended periods (EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). The EP-5 is
required to connect the camera to the EH-5a or EH-5; see page 204 for details.
Power
sources
•
•
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-on, slip-in, and rear-
interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
• The D5000 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular
polarizing filter instead.
Filters
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.
• To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed
against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.
•
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0,
+0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the
neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus
can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to +0.7 m–1).
Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus
can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used with eyepiece correction
lenses.
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
Optional
flash units
(0198)
•
•
•
•
•
Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400
Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200
Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package.
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer and save
photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
Software
Body cap
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an auto
update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet. See the websites
listed on page xvi for the latest information on supported operating systems.
The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust
when a lens is not in place.
n
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ML-L3 wireless remote control (067): Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits
or to prevent blur caused by camera shake. The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.
Remote
controls
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the gap
and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the
correct orientation (r).
The D5000 is equipped with an accessory terminal for
MC-DC2 remote cords (086) and GP-1 GPS units
(0114), which connect with the 4mark on the
connector aligned with the 2mark next to the
Accessory
terminal
accessory terminal as shown at right (to access the
accessory terminal, open the connector cover; close the
cover when the terminal is not in use).
accessories
Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D5000.
All cards of the designated make and capacity can be used, regardless of speed.
SanDisk 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB †, 8 GB †, 16 GB †
Toshiba 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB †, 8 GB †, 16 GB †, 32 GB †
Panasonic 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB †, 6 GB †, 8 GB †, 12 GB †, 16 GB †, 32 GB †
512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB †, 8 GB †
Lexar Media Platinum II: 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB † 8 GB †
Professional: 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB † 8 GB †
*
If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that the device supports 2GB cards.
† SDHC compliant. If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that the device
supports SDHC.
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please
contact the manufacturer.
n
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.
1 Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power connector (w)
covers.
2 Insert the EP-5 power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the correct orientation.
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power connector cable so that it passes
through the power connector slot and close the battery-
chamber cover.
4 Connect the AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and
the EP-5 power cable to the DC socket (r). A P icon is displayed in the
monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
e
r
n
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, return the monitor to the
storage position, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in
locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as
televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After
Camera
body
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
cloth and clean with care.
Lens,
mirror, and
viewfinder
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,
as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Monitor
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one
to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to
these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the
camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as
lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
n
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass
filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in
photographs, you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the
setup menu. The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚“Clean Now”
1 Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective
when the camera is placed base down as
shown at right.
2 Display the Clean image sensor menu.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup
menu and press 2.
G button
3 Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed while cleaning is in progress.
n
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Display the Clean image sensor menu as
described in Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and
press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight one of the following options and
press J.
Option
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the
camera is turned on.
5 Clean at startup
Clean at
6
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown
each time the camera is turned off.
shutdown
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at
7
8
& shutdown
Cleaning off
shutdown.
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor cleaning may not be
performed at startup if the flash is on.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be fully removed using
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0208) or
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be
performed again after a short wait.
n
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu (0206), the filter can be cleaned manually as
described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily
damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass
filter. Turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL9a battery or connect
an optional EP-5 power connector and EH-5a AC adapter.
2 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and press the G
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu
and press 2(note that this option is not
available at battery levels of H or below).
G button
4 Press J.
The message shown at right will be displayed in the
monitor. To restore normal operation without inspecting
the low-pass filter, turn the camera off.
5 Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The
mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the low-pass filter.
6 Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter,
examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 8.
n
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower. Do
not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only
be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the
filter.
8 Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is
raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp
will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact
with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D5000, however, is designed to
be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses
are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the
low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be
adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described
above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2
(available separately; 0202) or the clean image options available in some third-party
imaging applications.
n
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or
produce a white blur effect in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any
sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0206, 208) for information on cleaning the low-pass filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear
the curtain.
n
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If the
product will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and
store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera
case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant
gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery
away.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light.
This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction. Images recorded
with the product are unaffected.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes and mouth.
Return the monitor to the storage position before transporting the camera or leaving it
unattended.
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be
removed with a soft, dry cloth before use.
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when
handling batteries:
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe due caution when
handling the battery.
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
After removing the battery from the camera, be sure to replace the terminal cover.
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a
spare EN-EL9a battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice.
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged
before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and
exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.
n
Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accord with local
regulations.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Settings
The following tables list the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.
❚❚Modes Available from the Mode Dial
i
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
j
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
k
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
l
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
p
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
m
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
n
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
o
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
P
S
A
M
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Set Picture Control
Image quality 1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Image size 1
White balance 1
ISO sensitivity settings 1
Active D-Lighting 1
Auto distortion control
Color space
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
Active folder
Movie settings
Interval timer shooting
Release mode 1
Focus mode 1
AE-L/AF-L button hold 1
Flexible program 1
Metering 1
Exposure compensation 1
Bracketing 1
Flash mode 1
2
2
✔
— ✔ 2 — ✔ 2 — ✔ 2
✔
Flash compensation 1
a1: AF-area mode 1
a2: Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a3: Live view autofocus 1
a4: Rangefinder
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L
c2: Auto off timers
c3: Self-timer
c4: Remote on duration
d1: Beep
d2: Viewfinder grid display
d3: ISO display
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
d4: File number sequence
d5: Exposure delay mode
d6: Date imprint
n
d7: Live view display options
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
j
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
k
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
l
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
p
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
m
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
n
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
o
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
P
S
A
M
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash
e2: Auto bracketing set
f1: Assign E/Fn button
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f3: Reverse dial rotation
f4: No memory card?
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
f5: Reverse indicators
1 Reset with two-button reset (078).
2 Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.
3 Reset with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings).
❚❚hModes
r
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
s
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
t
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
u
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
v
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
w
x
y
z
0
1
2
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
3
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Set Picture Control
Image quality 1
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Image size 1
White balance
ISO sensitivity settings 1
Active D-Lighting
Auto distortion control
Color space
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
Active folder
Movie settings
Interval timer shooting
Release mode 1
✔ ✔
Focus mode 1
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
AE-L/AF-L button hold 1
Flexible program
Metering
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
Exposure compensation
Bracketing
Flash mode 1, 2
Flash compensation
a1: AF-area mode 1, 2
a2: Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a3: Live view autofocus 1, 2
a4: Rangefinder
✔
✔ ✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.
✔
n
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
s
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
t
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
u
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
v
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
w
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
x
y
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
z
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
0
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L
c2: Auto off timers
c3: Self-timer
c4: Remote on duration
d1: Beep
d2: Viewfinder grid display
d3: ISO display
d4: File number sequence
d5: Exposure delay mode
d6: Date imprint
d7: Live view display options
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash
e2: Auto bracketing set
f1: Assign E/Fn button
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f3: Reverse dial rotation
f4: No memory card?
f5: Reverse indicators
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1 Reset with two-button reset (078).
2 Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.
3 Reset with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings).
n
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on
a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme III 30MB/s Edition SDHC card at different image quality and
size settings.
Image quality
Image size
File size 1
16.7 MB
14.0 MB
12.1 MB
13.4 MB
12.3 MB
11.3 MB
12.0 MB
11.5 MB
11.0 MB
10.6 MB
5.9 MB
3.3 MB
1.5 MB
3.0 MB
1.7 MB
0.8 MB
1.5 MB
0.9 MB
0.4 MB
No. of images 1
180
Buffer capacity 2
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
—
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
11
63
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
NEF +
210
238
215
235
252
238
250
259
268
549
969
2100
1000
1800
4100
2100
3600
7700
JPEG fine 3
NEF +
JPEG normal 3
NEF +
JPEG basic 3
NEF (RAW)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer. Drops if ISO sensitivity is set to
Hi 0.3 or higher, High ISO NR is on when ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher, or long exposure noise
reduction or auto distortion control (0150) is on.
3 Image size applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed. File size is the
total for NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.
n
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure Program
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:
F (lens focal length) ≤ 55 mm
55mm < F ≤ 135 mm
135 mm < F
f1
f1.4
f2
f2.8
f4
f5.6
f8
f11
f16
f22
f32
Shutter speed
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph
assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,
values over 171/3 EV are reduced to 171/3 EV.
n
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative.
Display
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction lenses
(025, 202).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (016, 28).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers,
0157).
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If
information display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-release
button, confirm that On is selected for Auto Information Display (0168) and that battery is
charged.
Camera does not respond to controls: See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras,” below.
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of this display vary
with temperature.
A A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may
appear in the monitor and the camera may stop
Memory card
functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is
slot cover
caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the
camera off, remove and replace the battery, taking
care to avoid burns, and turn the camera on again, or, if
you are using an AC adapter (available separately),
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the
Reset button
camera on again. If the problem persists, turn the camera off, open the memory card slot
cover and, using a paper clip, press the reset button by the memory card slot (this also resets
the camera clock). Note that disconnecting the power source or pressing the reset button
may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem
occurred. Data already recorded to the card will not be affected. In the event of continued
malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
n
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shooting (All Modes)
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (024, 29, 22).
• Built-in flash is charging (032).
• Camera is not in focus (031).
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number (0194).
• Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0195).
•
Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f4 (No memory card?, 0164).
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage
is approximately 95%.
Photos are out of focus:
• AF-S or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S or AF-I lens or focus manually.
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (058, 60).
• Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (060).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus
when AF-C focus mode is selected or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode.
Can not select focus point:
• Auto-area selected for AF-area mode: choose another mode (056).
• Face priority or subject tracking AF selected in live view (043).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters (029).
Can not select subject tracking autofocus mode: Monochrome Picture Control selected (0107).
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (054).
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (063).
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0151).
Randomly-spaced bright pixels (“noise”) appear in photos:
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on (0151).
• Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: use long exposure noise reduction (0151).
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• Camera is in l, m, r, t, u, v, or w mode: select another mode (033).
• AF-assist lamp does not light for continuous-servo autofocus. Choose AF-S. In single-point,
dynamic-area, or 3D-tracking AF, select center focus point (058).
•
Off selected for Custom Setting a2 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator, 0155).
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use;
wait for lamp to cool down.
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:
• Replace battery in remote control (0203).
• Choose remote control mode (065, 67).
• Flash is charging (032).
• Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration) has passed: reselect remote
control mode (0157).
n
• Bright light is interfering with remote.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform
image sensor cleaning (0206).
Date is not imprinted on photographs: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for
image quality (062, 160).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Shutter-release disabled:
• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0195).
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “bulb” or “time” selected in mode M: choose
new shutter speed (082).
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use (072).
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (096).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0106).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0100).
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D5000
(0102).
White balance bracketing unavailable: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for
image quality (063).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or
saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (0109).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (089).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (090).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode: Lower built-in
flash (066).
Reddish areas appear in photos or textures are uneven: Reddish areas and uneven textures may appear
in long time-exposures. Turn long exposure noise reduction on when shooting at shutter
speeds of “bulb” or “time” (0151).
n
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Flashing areas, shooting data, or graphs appear on images: Press 1or 3to choose photo information
displayed, or change settings for Display mode (0117, 146).
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG (063).
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is
automatically selected after photograph is taken (0146).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0147).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0170).
• Camera orientation was changed while shutter-release button was pressed in continuous
release mode or camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (066).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0147).
Can not delete picture:
• Picture is protected: remove protection (0125).
• Memory card is locked (024).
Can not retouch picture:
• Photo can not be further edited with D5000 (0175).
• Picture is a movie: movies can not be retouched (0174).
Can not change print order:
• Memory card is full: delete pictures (029).
• Memory card is locked (024).
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)
processing or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2
(0134).
Picture is not displayed on TV: Choose correct video mode (0168).
Picture is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable (available separately)
is connected (0133).
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card
reader to copy photos to computer (0134).
NEF (RAW) photos not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0202).
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the
position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not
be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed (0171).
Miscellaneous
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (021, 169).
n
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings
or when no memory card is inserted (015, 22, 174).
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and
monitor.
A Warning Icons
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a warning or error message
can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the Q (W) button.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Lock lens aperture ring
at minimum aperture
(largest f/-number).
B
Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture
19,
194
(blinks) (largest f-number).
• Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.
• If non-CPU lens is attached, select mode M.
F/s
(blinks)
18
195
Lens not attached.
Shutter-release disabled.
Recharge battery.
Turn camera off and recharge or replace battery. 16, 17
This battery can not be used.
Choose battery designated
for use in this camera.
Initialization error.
Turn camera off and then on
again.
Battery level is low.
Complete operation and turn
camera off immediately.
d
(blinks)
Use Nikon-approved battery (EN-EL9a).
202
17, 28
209
Turn camera off, remove and replace battery, and
then turn camera on again.
End cleaning and turn camera off and recharge or
replace battery.
—
21,
169
Clock not set.
—
Set camera clock.
Turn camera off and confirm that card is correctly
inserted.
Memory card is locked (write protected). Slide
card write-protect switch to “write” position.
• Use approved card.
• Format card. If problem persists, card may be
damaged. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
• Error creating new folder. Delete files or insert
new memory card.
No memory card.
S
22
24
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write” position.
(
(blinks)
203
23
This memory card cannot be
used. Card may be damaged.
Insert another card.
k
(blinks)
40,
126
22
• Insert new memory card.
This card is not formatted.
Format card?
T
Format card or turn camera off and insert new
23
(blinks) memory card.
• Reduce quality or size.
• Delete photographs.
62
40,
126
22
j
(blinks)
Card is full
n
• Insert new memory card.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
31,
55, 60
●
Camera can not focus using autofocus. Change
—
(blinks) composition or focus manually.
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity
• Use commercial ND filter
74
—
Subject is too bright.
q
r
• In mode:
S Increase shutter speed
A Choose a smaller aperture (larger f-number)
• Use a higher ISO sensitivity
• Use flash
• In mode:
S Lower shutter speed
82
83
74
70
Subject is too dark.
No Bulb in S mode.
82
83
A Choose a larger aperture (smaller f-number)
A
(blinks)
&
Change shutter speed or select manual exposure
mode.
82, 84
(blinks)
Menus and playback not available during interval
timer shooting. To end interval timer shooting,
turn camera off.
Flash has fired at full power. Check photo in
monitor; if underexposed, adjust settings and try
again.
Interval timer shooting
—
—
—
—
N
(blinks)
Flash is in TTL mode. Choose
another setting or use a CPU
lens.
Change flash mode setting on optional flash unit
or use CPU lens.
194
• Use the flash.
• Change distance to subject, aperture, flash
range, or ISO sensitivity.
• Optional SB-400 flash unit attached: flash is in
bounce position or focus distance is very short.
Continue shooting; if necessary, increase focus
distance to prevent shadows from appearing in
photograph.
70
73,
74,83
—
—
N/s
(blinks)
Error occurred updating firmware for optional
flash unit. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Flash error
—
Eye-Fi upload could not be
disabled.
The card is still transmitting
and pictures may be
uploaded.
The Eye-Fi card is still transmitting data after
Disable has been selected for Eye-Fi upload. To
terminate wireless transmission, turn the camera
off and remove the card.
—
173
n
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Release shutter. If error persists or appears
frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Error. Press shutter release
button again.
—
Start-up error. Contact a
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Autoexposure error. Contact
a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
O
(blinks)
Consult Nikon-authorized service representative.
—
Folder selected for playback contains no images.
Insert another memory card or select a different
folder.
File has been created or modified using a
computer or different make of camera, or file is
corrupt.
Memory card does not contain NEF (RAW) images
for use with NEF (RAW) processing.
Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if
available).
Paper is not selected size. Insert paper of correct
size and select Continue.
22,
146
Folder contains no images.
—
—
File does not contain image
data.
Cannot select this file.
175
184
No image for retouching.
Check printer.
—
—
—
*
—
*
Check paper.
—
*
Paper jam.
—
—
—
—
Clear jam and select Continue.
—
—
—
—
*
Out of paper.
Check ink supply.
Out of ink.
Insert paper of selected size and select Continue.
Check ink. To resume, select Continue.
Replace ink and select Continue.
*
*
* See printer manual for more information.
n
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❚❚Nikon D5000 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Lens mount
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)
Effective picture angle Approx. 1.5 × lens focal length (Nikon DX format)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
12.3 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
23.6 × 15.8 mm CMOS sensor
12.9 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional
Capture NX 2 software required)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
• 4,288 × 2,848 (L)
• 3,216 × 2,136 (M)
• 2,144 × 1,424 (S)
File format
•
•
NEF (RAW)
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression
•
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and
JPEG formats
Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape; storage for additional custom Picture Controls
Media
File system
SD (Secure Digital) memory cards, SDHC-compliant
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order
Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still
Cameras), PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex viewfinder
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
Approx. 0.78 × (50mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1
)
17.9 mm (–1.0 m–1
–1.7–+0.7 m–1
)
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark V screen with focus frame (framing
grid can be displayed)
Reflex mirror
Lens aperture
Quick return
Instant return, electronically controlled
n
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lens
Compatible lenses
•
•
AF-S or AF-I: All functions supported.
Type G or D AF NIKKOR without built-in autofocus motor: All functions except
autofocus supported. IX NIKKOR lenses not supported.
Other AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and 3D color
matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.
Type D PC NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and some
shooting modes.
AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and 3D color
matrix metering II.
Non-CPU: Autofocus not supported. Can be used in mode M, but
exposure meter does not function.
•
•
•
•
Electronic rangefinder can be used if lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6
or faster.
Shutter
Type
Speed
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter
1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb, time (requires optional ML-L3
wireless remote control)
Flash sync speed
X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower
Release
Release mode
8 (single frame), I (continuous), E (self-timer), " (delayed remote),
# (quick response), v (quiet shutter-release)
Frame advance rate
Up to 4 fps (manual focus, mode M or S, shutter speed 1/250 s or faster, and
other settings at default values)
Self-timer
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration and from 1 to 9 shots
Exposure
Metering
TTL exposure metering using 420-pixel RGB sensor
Metering method
•
Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix
metering II (other CPU lenses)
•
•
Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center of frame
Spot: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on selected
focus point
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
Exposure meter
coupling
•
•
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
Spot metering: 2–20 EV
CPU
Mode
Auto modes (i auto; j auto (flash off)); scene modes (k portrait;
l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night portrait; r night
landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/dawn;
w pet portrait; x candlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food;
1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key); programmed auto with flexible
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual
(M)
n
Exposure
compensation
–5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
Exposure bracketing 3 frames in steps of 1/3 or ½ EV
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure
White balance
bracketing
3 frames in steps of 1
ADL bracketing
Exposure lock
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
Active D-Lighting
2 frames
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button
ISO 200 – 3200 in steps of 1/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or
1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent) below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO
6400 equivalent) above ISO 3200.
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Focus
Autofocus
Nikon Multi-CAM 1000 autofocus module with TTL phase detection, 11
focus points (including one cross-type sensor), and AF-assist illuminator
(range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.)
Detection range
Lens servo
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
•
Autofocus (AF): Instant single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C);
auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated
automatically according to subject status
•
Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus point
AF-area mode
Focus lock
Can be selected from 11 focus points
Single point, dynamic area, auto-area, 3D-tracking (11 points)
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-
servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button
Flash
Built-in flash
i, k, p, n, o, s, w: Auto flash with auto pop-up
0, P, S, A, M: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number (m/ft.,
at 20 °C/68 °F)
Flash control
•
•
•
At ISO 200: Approx. 17/56, 18/59 with manual flash
At ISO 100: Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash
TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR
using 420-pixel RGB sensor are available with built-in flash and SB-900,
SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400 (i-TTL balanced fill-flash is available when
matrix or center-weighted metering is selected)
•
•
Auto aperture: Available with SB-900, SB-800 and CPU lens
Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900, SB-800, SB-80DX,
SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22S
•
Range-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800
Flash mode
• i, k, p, n, s, w: Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, off; fill-flash and
red-eye reduction available with optional flash units
• o: Auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, off; slow
sync and slow sync with red-eye reduction available with optional
flash units
• l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y, z, 1, 2, 3: Fill-flash and red-eye reduction
available with optional flash units
• 0: Fill-flash
•
P, A: Fill-flash, rear-curtain with slow sync, slow sync, slow sync with
red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction
n
•
S, M: Fill-flash, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction
Flash compensation
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or ½ EV
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully charged; blinks for
3 s after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
Standard ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in flash, SB-900,
System (CLS)
SB-800, or SU-800 as commander; Flash Color Information
Communication supported with built-in flash and all CLS-compatible
flash units
Sync terminal
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)
White balance
White balance
Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor and 420 segment RGB
sensor); 12 manual modes with fine-tuning; preset white balance; white
balance bracketing
Live view
AF modes
Autofocus
Face priority, wide area, normal area, subject tracking
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point
automatically when face-priority AF or subject tracking is selected)
Movie
Image size (pixels)
• 1,280 × 720/24 fps
• 320 × 216/24 fps
AVI
• 640 × 424/24 fps
File format
Compression
Motion-JPEG
Monitor
Monitor
2.7-in., approx. 230k-dot, vari-angle TFT LCD, with 100% frame coverage
and brightness adjustment
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with
playback zoom, movie playback, stop-motion movie playback, slide
show, histogram display, highlights, auto image rotation, and image
comment (up to 36 characters)
Interface
USB
Hi-Speed USB
Video output
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be displayed on
external device while camera monitor is on
Type C HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is
connected.
HDMI output
Accessory terminal
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)
Supported languages
Supported languages Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish
n
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power source
Battery
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL9a battery
AC adapter
EH-5a AC adapter; requires EP-5 power connector (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Weight
Approx. 127 × 104 × 80 mm (5.0 × 4.1 × 3.1 in.)
Approx. 560 g (1 lb. 3.8 oz.) without battery, memory card, or body cap
Operating environment
Temperature
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Humidity
Less than 85% (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at
an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable
for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
MH-23 quick charger
Rated input
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)
Rated output
DC 8.4 V/900 mA
Supported batteries
Charging time
Nikon EN-EL9a or EN-EL9 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Approx. 1 hour and 40 minutes (EN-E9a) or 1 hour and 30 minutes
(EN-EL9) when battery is fully discharged
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Dimensions
Approx. 82.5 × 28 × 65mm (3.2 × 1.1 × 2.6 in.)
(W × H × D)
Length of cord
Weight
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding power cable
EN-EL9a rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Weight
7.2 V/1080 mAh
Approx. 36 × 14 × 56 mm (1.4 × 0.6 × 2.2 in.)
Approx. 51 g (1.8 oz.), excluding terminal cover
n
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens
Type
G-type AF-S DX Zoom-NIKKOR lens with built-in CPU and Nikon bayonet
mount
Supported cameras
Focal length
Nikon digital SLR cameras (DX format)
18–55mm
Maximum aperture
Construction
Picture angle
f/3.5–5.6
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical element)
76 °–28 ° 50 ´
Focal length scale (mm) 18, 24, 35, 45, 55
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom control
Zoom adjusted by rotating separate zoom ring
Focusing
Vibration reduction
Autofocus with Silent Wave Motor; manual focus
Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Closest focus distance 0.28 m (11 in.) from focal plane mark (061) at all zoom settings
Diaphragm
Aperture range
Metering
Seven-blade diaphragm with rounded blades and fully automatic aperture
f/3.5–22 at 18 mm; f/5.6–36 at 55 mm
Maximum aperture
Attachment size
Dimensions
52 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Approx. 73 mm diameter × 79.5 mm/2.9 × 3.1 in. (from surface of
bayonet mount to end of lens)
Weight
Approx. 265 g (9.3 oz.)
Lens hood
HB-45 (available separately; attaches as shown below)
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described
in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages
that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
n
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Supported Standards
•
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes
of camera.
•
•
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.
Exif version 2.21: The D5000 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for
Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output
on Exif-compliant printers.
•
•
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without
first transferring them to a computer.
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft,
Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD
Card Association. PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks. HDMI, the HDMI logo and
High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation
provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
n
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries varies with the
condition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. Sample figures
for EN-EL9a (1080 mAh) batteries are given below.
•
•
Single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1): Approximately 510 shots
Continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2): Approximately 2900 shots
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every
30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for
exposure meters to turn off after monitor is turned off; flash fired at full power
once every other shot. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens
under the following test conditions: continuous release mode, focus mode set
to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), white
balance set to v, ISO sensitivity set to ISO 200, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus
cycled from infinity to minimum range three times after shutter-release button
has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then taken in succession and
monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure
meters have turned off.
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using a GP-1 GPS unit
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL9a batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left
unused.
n
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Border (PictBridge) ............ 138, 141
Bracketing....................103, 162, 163
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ....155
Bulb..................................................... 86
Burst.................................................... 66
Symbols
Numerics
i (Auto mode)................................ 28
j (Auto (flash off) mode) ........... 28
k (Portrait) ....................................... 34
l (Landscape)................................. 34
p (Child)............................................ 34
m (Sports).......................................... 34
n (Close up)..................................... 35
o (Night portrait)........................... 35
r (Night landscape)...................... 35
s (Party/indoor)............................. 35
t (Beach/snow).............................. 36
u (Sunset)......................................... 36
v (Dusk/dawn) ............................... 36
w (Pet portrait) ............................... 36
x (Candlelight)................................. 37
y (Blossom)...................................... 37
z (Autumn colors)......................... 37
0 (Food)............................................. 37
1 (Silhouette).................................. 38
2 (High key)..................................... 38
3 (Low key)...................................... 38
P (Programmed auto).................... 81
S (Shutter-priority auto) ............... 82
A (Aperture-priority auto)............ 83
M (Manual) ........................................ 84
U (flexible program) ...................... 81
a (Live view)............................ 42, 50
m (White balance) ........................ 96
L (Preset manual) ...................... 99
8 (Single frame) ............................ 65
I (Continuous).............................. 65
E (Self-timer)...................65, 67, 157
" (Delayed remote) ............ 65, 67
# (Quick-response remote) .. 65, 67
v (Quiet shutter-release) ........... 65
L (Matrix) ......................................... 88
M (Center-weighted) .................... 88
N (Spot)............................................. 88
e (AE bracketing) ......................103
f (White balance bracketing)......
103
3D color matrix metering II......... 88
3D-tracking ...................................... 57
3D-tracking (11 points) (AF-area
mode) ............................................... 57
420-pixel RGB sensor .................... 88
C
Calendar ..........................................123
Calendar playback .......................123
Camera Control Pro 2........ 134, 202
Center-weighted ............................ 88
Charging a battery......................... 16
Clean image sensor.....................206
Clock ..........................................20, 169
Clock battery.................................... 21
Cloudy (White balance) ............... 96
CLS.....................................................198
Color balance.................................179
Color outline ..................................186
Color space.....................................150
Color temperature ......................... 97
Compatible lens............................194
Computer........................................134
Connecting a GPS to the camera...
114
Continuous (Release mode)....... 65
Continuous-servo AF .................... 54
CPU contacts..................................194
CPU lens....................................19, 194
Creative Lighting System ..........198
Cross screen (Filter effects).......178
Custom Settings ...........................153
Cyanotype.......................................178
A
A/V cable.........................................132
AC adapter............................ 202, 204
Accessories .....................................202
Active D-Lighting........ 94, 103, 163
Active D-Lighting bracketing .103,
163
Active folder...................................152
Add items (MY MENU)................191
ADL bracketing ................... 103, 163
Adobe RGB .....................................150
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing
set)...................................................103
AE-L ............................................89, 164
AE-L/AF-L button................59, 89, 164
AF..................................................54–59
AF assist................... 31, 55, 155, 197
AF-area mode.........................56, 155
A-M switch................................. 18, 60
Amber........................................98, 179
Aperture ..................................... 80, 83
Aperture-priority auto.................. 83
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...........164
Assign E/Fn button .....................163
Attaching the lens.......................... 18
Audio video cable........................132
Auto (White balance).................... 96
Auto bracketing set........... 103, 162
Auto dim..........................................166
Auto distortion control ..............150
Auto image rotation....................170
Auto information display ..........168
Auto meter off........................29, 157
Auto off timers ..............................157
Auto-area (AF-area mode) .......... 57
Autofocus...................................54–59
Auto-servo AF.................................. 54
Available Settings ........................212
D
Date and time.........................20, 169
Date counter........................ 160, 161
Date format .............................20, 169
Date imprint...................................160
Daylight saving time............20, 169
DCF version 2.0 ................... 150, 230
Default settings .....................78, 154
Delayed remote (Release mode)....
65, 67
Delete........................................40, 126
Delete all images..........................127
Delete current image...........40, 126
Delete selected images..............127
Digital Print Order Format........136,
139, 143, 230
g (ADL bracketing).............103
Y (Flash compensation) ............ 92
E (Exposure compensation)...... 90
R (Information) button..................8
P (Information edit) button.........9
d (Help)............................................. 13
I (focus indicator)........... 31, 58, 61
N (flash-ready indicator).............. 32
3 (“Beep” indicator).....................158
+ NEF (RAW)...................................163
B
Battery.................................. 16, 17, 28
Beep..................................................158
Black-and-white............................178
Blue ............................................98, 179
Blue intensifier (Filter effects)..178
Body cap.............................. 3, 18, 202
Diopter adjustment control ...... 25,
202
Direct sunlight (White balance) 96
Display mode.................................146
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Distortion control ........................185
D-Lighting ......................................176
DPOF.....................136, 139, 143, 230
Dynamic area....................................57
Lens mount ...........................3, 18, 61
Lens VR switch................................. 18
Live view............................41, 49, 155
Live view autofocus.....................155
Live view display options..........161
Lo (Sensitivity).......................... 74, 75
Lock mirror up for cleaning......208
Long exp. NR..................................151
Long time-exposure with remote
control.............................................. 86
G
GPS...........................................114, 121
GPS data..........................................121
Green.........................................98, 179
Green intensifier (Filter effects)......
178
E
EV steps for exposure cntrl.......156
Exif version 2.21...................150, 230
Exposure...............................80, 89, 90
Exposure bracketing..........103, 162
Exposure compensation...............90
Exposure delay mode.................159
Exposure indicator..........................85
Exposure lock ...................................89
Exposure meters....................29, 157
Exposure mode................................80
Exposure program.......................216
H
HDMI.............................. 133, 168, 230
Help..................................................... 13
Hi (Sensitivity) ...........................74, 75
High definition........... 133, 168, 230
High ISO NR....................................151
Highlights ..............................119, 146
Histogram..............................118, 146
M
M (Image size) ................................. 64
Magenta ...................................98, 179
Manage Picture Control.............111
Manual........................................ 60, 84
Manual focus ............................ 47, 60
Matrix ................................................. 88
Maximum aperture ....................... 61
Maximum sensitivity...................149
Medium ............................................. 64
Memory buffer......................... 31, 66
Memory card .................22, 203, 215
Memory card capacity................215
Metering............................................ 88
Minimum aperture................. 19, 80
Minimum shutter speed............149
Mirror........................................... 3, 208
Monitor.......................7, 42, 116, 166
Monochrome (Filter effects).....178
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)
107
I
F
Image comment...........................169
Image Dust Off ref photo..........171
Image overlay................................182
Image quality .................................. 62
Image review.................................147
Image size......................................... 64
Incandescent (White balance) .. 96
Index print......................................142
Info display format ......................166
Info wrap-around.........................168
In-focus indicator..............31, 58, 61
Information ......................8, 117, 166
Interval timer shooting................ 76
ISO display......................................158
ISO sensitivity.........................74, 149
ISO sensitivity auto control ......149
ISO sensitivity settings...............149
i-TTL ..................................................162
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR...................................................162
Face priority ......................................43
File information ............................117
File number sequence................159
Filter effects...........................109, 178
Fine-Tuning White Balance..........98
Firmware version..........................173
Fisheye.............................................185
Flash.............................32, 70, 71, 198
Flash (White balance)....................96
Flash cntrl for built-in flash.......162
Flash compensation.......................92
Flash control ..................................162
Flash mode........................................71
Flash range........................................73
Flash ready indicator ...........32, 200
Flash sync speed ..........................225
Flexible program.............................81
Fluorescent (White balance).......96
Fn button.........................................163
f-number..................................83, 194
Focal length ...................................197
Focal length scale ...........................18
Focal plane mark.............................61
Focus ........................................... 54–61
Focus indicator...................31, 58, 61
Focus lock ..........................................58
Focus mode.......................................54
Focus point...................30, 54, 58, 61
Focus tracking..................................57
Focusing screen............................224
Focusing the viewfinder...............25
Focus-mode switch .................18, 60
Format.................................................23
Format memory card.....................23
Frame interval (Slide show)......129
Front-curtain sync...........................72
Full-frame playback.....................116
Mounting index.............................. 18
Movie settings................................. 51
Movies................................................ 50
MY MENU........................................190
N
NEF ...................................................... 62
NEF (RAW).......................62, 134, 184
NEF (RAW) processing................184
Neutral (Set Picture Control)....107
Nikon Transfer ......................134, 135
No memory card? ........................164
Noise reduction ............................151
Non-CPU lens ................................195
Normal area...................................... 43
Number of shots...........................157
J
JPEG .................................................... 62
JPEG basic......................................... 62
JPEG fine............................................ 62
JPEG normal..................................... 62
L
L (Image size)................................... 64
Landscape (Set Picture Control).....
107
Language.................................20, 169
Large................................................... 64
LCD....................................................166
LCD brightness..............................166
Lens.....................................18, 19, 194
Lens cap............................................. 18
Lens focus ring................................ 18
O
Optional flash................................162
Overview data...............................121
P
Page size (PictBridge) ........137, 141
Perspective control......................186
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Photo info ............................. 117, 146
PictBridge.............................. 136, 230
Picture angle..................................197
Picture Controls .................. 106, 108
Playback ...................................39, 116
Playback folder..............................146
Playback information........ 117, 146
Playback menu..............................146
Playback zoom..............................124
Portrait (Set Picture Control)....107
Preset manual (White balance) 96,
99
Press the shutter-release button
all the way down .......................... 32
Press the shutter-release button
halfway...................................... 31, 32
Print (DPOF)....................................139
Print select......................................139
Print set (DPOF).............................143
Printing ............................................136
Programmed auto.......................... 81
Protecting photographs............125
UTC................................... 20, 114, 121
S
V
S (Image size)................................... 64
Self-timer...........................65, 67, 157
Self-timer delay.............................157
Sensitivity.................................74, 149
Sepia .................................................178
Set Picture Control.......................108
Setup menu....................................165
Shade (White balance)................. 96
Shooting data...................... 119, 120
Shooting menu.............................148
Shutter-priority auto..................... 82
Shutter-release button.. 32, 58, 89,
156
Shutter-release button AE-L.....156
Side-by-side comparison ..........189
Single point (AF-area mode)...... 57
Single-frame (Release mode)..... 65
Single-servo AF............................... 54
Size ............................................... 51, 64
Skylight (Filter effects)................178
Slide show.......................................129
Slow sync .......................................... 72
Small ................................................... 64
Small picture..................................180
Soft (Filter effects)........................179
Sound (Movie settings)................ 51
Speedlight ......................................198
Spot..................................................... 88
sRGB..................................................150
Standard (Set Picture Control).107
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
SLR ...................................................162
Start printing (PictBridge)138, 141
Stop-motion movie.....................187
Straighten .......................................185
Subject tracking ............................. 43
Vibration Reduction...................... 19
Video mode....................................168
Viewfinder.................... 6, 25, 67, 224
Viewfinder eyepiece............... 67, 77
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ...... 67, 77
Viewfinder grid display ..............158
ViewNX.............................................134
Vivid (Set Picture Control).........107
W
Warm filter (Filter effects)..........178
WB...............................................96, 103
WB bracketing...............................103
White balance.................................. 96
White balance bracketing.........103
Wide area .......................................... 43
Q
Quality (Movie settings)............... 51
Quick retouch................................185
Quick-response remote (Release
mode) ............................................... 65
Quiet shutter-release (Release
mode) ............................................... 65
R
Rangefinder ...................................156
Rank items (MY MENU) ..............192
Rear lens cap.................................... 18
Rear-curtain sync ........................... 72
Recent settings .............................190
Red intensifier (Filter effects) ...178
Red-eye correction ......................176
Red-eye reduction ......................... 72
Release mode .................................. 65
Remote Control...............67, 86, 203
Remote cord ...........................86, 203
Remote on duration....................157
Remove items (MY MENU)........191
Removing the lens from the
camera.............................................. 19
Reset ..........................................78, 154
Reset custom settings ................154
Restoring default settings..78, 154
Retouch menu...............................174
Reverse dial rotation...................164
Reverse indicators........................164
RGB.......................................... 118, 150
RGB Histogram..............................118
Rotate tall........................................147
T
Television ........................................132
Thumbnail playback ...................122
Time .................................................... 86
Time stamp (PictBridge) .. 138, 141
Time zone.................................20, 169
Time zone and date..............20, 169
Timer................................................... 67
Toning .................................... 109, 110
Trim ...................................................177
Two-button reset ........................... 78
Type D lens .....................................194
Type G lens .....................................194
U
USB .......................................... 135, 136
USB cable .............................. 135, 136
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|